This commit was manufactured by cvs2svn to create tag 'old_debug'.

git-svn-id: https://svn.wxwidgets.org/svn/wx/wxWidgets/tags/old_debug@217 c3d73ce0-8a6f-49c7-b76d-6d57e0e08775
1998-07-10 10:39:48 +00:00
1638 changed files with 26765 additions and 220881 deletions
--- a/.cvsignore
+++ b/.cvsignore
@@ -1,4 +0,0 @@
 system.list
 bin
 .gdb_history
 Test
--- a/2
+++ b/2
@@ -58,7 +58,7 @@ user::
 makefiles:: recreate
 Makefiles:: recreate
 recreate::
-	@setup/general/createall
+	@src/gtk/setup/general/createall
 # the following ones define what needs to be done to distribute the 
 # library and its components
--- a/distrib/msw/generic.rsp
+++ b/distrib/msw/generic.rsp
@@ -9,9 +9,6 @@ docs/todo.txt
 docs/licence.txt
 docs/symbols.txt
 src/*.inc
 src/mkdir
 src/common/*.cpp
 src/common/dosyacc.c
 src/common/doslex.c
@@ -51,7 +48,6 @@ src/zlib/*.3
 src/zlib/*.mms
 include/wx/*.h
 include/wx/*.cpp
 include/wx/wx_setup.vms
 include/wx/common/*.h
 include/wx/generic/*.h
@@ -88,7 +84,6 @@ utils/wxhelp/src/*.cpp
 utils/wxhelp/src/*.h
 utils/wxhelp/src/makefile.*
 utils/wxhelp/src/*.xbm
 utils/wxhelp/src/*.xpm
 utils/wxhelp/src/*.txt
 utils/wxhelp/src/*.ico
 utils/wxhelp/src/*.def
@@ -99,7 +94,6 @@ utils/tex2rtf/src/*.cpp
 utils/tex2rtf/src/*.h
 utils/tex2rtf/src/make*.*
 utils/tex2rtf/src/*.xbm
 utils/tex2rtf/src/*.xpm
 utils/tex2rtf/src/*.sty
 utils/tex2rtf/src/*.ini
 utils/tex2rtf/src/*.inf
@@ -117,7 +111,6 @@ utils/wxtree/src/*.cpp
 utils/wxtree/src/*.h
 utils/wxtree/src/makefile.*
 utils/wxtree/src/*.xbm
 utils/wxtree/src/*.xpm
 utils/wxtree/lib/dummy
 utils/wxtree/src/*.ico
 utils/wxtree/src/*.def
@@ -128,7 +121,6 @@ utils/wxgraph/src/*.c
 utils/wxgraph/src/*.h
 utils/wxgraph/src/makefile.*
 utils/wxgraph/src/*.xbm
 utils/wxgraph/src/*.xpm
 utils/wxgraph/lib/dummy
 utils/wxgraph/src/*.ico
 utils/wxgraph/src/*.def
@@ -151,7 +143,6 @@ utils/rcparser/src/*.c
 utils/rcparser/src/*.h
 utils/rcparser/src/makefile.*
 utils/rcparser/src/*.xbm
 utils/rcparser/src/*.xpm
 utils/rcparser/lib/dummy
 utils/rcparser/src/*.ico
 utils/rcparser/src/*.def
@@ -164,7 +155,6 @@ utils/colours/*.def
 utils/colours/*.rc
 utils/colours/makefile.*
 utils/colours/*.xbm
 utils/colours/*.xpm
 utils/colours/*.txt
 utils/wxprop/src/*.h
@@ -173,21 +163,18 @@ utils/wxprop/src/*.def
 utils/wxprop/src/*.rc
 utils/wxprop/src/makefile.*
 utils/wxprop/src/*.xbm
 utils/wxprop/src/*.xpm
 utils/wxprop/src/*.txt
 utils/wxprop/src/*.ico
 utils/wxprop/src/*.bmp
 utils/wxprop/lib/dummy
 utils/dialoged/src/bitmaps/*.xbm
 utils/dialoged/src/bitmaps/*.xpm
 utils/dialoged/src/*.h
 utils/dialoged/src/*.cpp
 utils/dialoged/src/*.def
 utils/dialoged/src/*.rc
 utils/dialoged/src/makefile.*
 utils/dialoged/src/*.xbm
 utils/dialoged/src/*.xpm
 utils/dialoged/src/*.txt
 utils/dialoged/src/*.inf
 utils/dialoged/test/*.h
@@ -208,24 +195,22 @@ utils/dialoged/test/*.bmp
 samples/*.txt
 samples/makefile.*
-samples/config/*.cpp
+samples/hello/*.cpp
-samples/config/*.h
+samples/hello/*.h
-samples/config/*.def
+samples/hello/*.def
-samples/config/makefile*.*
+samples/hello/makefile.*
-samples/config/*.xbm
+samples/hello/*.xbm
-samples/config/*.xpm
+samples/hello/*.txt
-samples/config/*.txt
+samples/hello/*.ico
-samples/config/*.ico
+samples/hello/*.bmp
-samples/config/*.bmp
+samples/hello/*.rc
-samples/config/*.rc
+samples/hello/*.wav
 samples/config/*.wav
 samples/dynamic/*.cpp
 samples/dynamic/*.h
 samples/dynamic/*.def
-samples/dynamic/makefile*.*
+samples/dynamic/makefile.*
 samples/dynamic/*.xbm
 samples/dynamic/*.xpm
 samples/dynamic/*.txt
 samples/dynamic/*.ico
 samples/dynamic/*.bmp
@@ -235,9 +220,8 @@ samples/dynamic/*.wav
 samples/bombs/*.cpp
 samples/bombs/*.h
 samples/bombs/*.def
-samples/bombs/makefile*.*
+samples/bombs/makefile.*
 samples/bombs/*.xbm
 samples/bombs/*.xpm
 samples/bombs/*.txt
 samples/bombs/*.ico
 samples/bombs/*.bmp
@@ -246,9 +230,8 @@ samples/bombs/*.rc
 samples/ipc/*.cpp
 samples/ipc/*.h
 samples/ipc/*.def
-samples/ipc/makefile*.*
+samples/ipc/makefile.*
 samples/ipc/*.xbm
 samples/ipc/*.xpm
 samples/ipc/*.ico
 samples/ipc/*.rc
@@ -257,9 +240,8 @@ samples/types/*.h
 samples/types/*.def
 samples/types/*.rc
 samples/types/*.txt
-samples/types/makefile*.*
+samples/types/makefile.*
 samples/types/*.xbm
 samples/types/*.xpm
 samples/types/*.ico
 samples/resource/*.cpp
@@ -268,26 +250,23 @@ samples/resource/*.def
 samples/resource/*.rc
 samples/resource/*.txt
 samples/resource/*.wxr
-samples/resource/makefile*.*
+samples/resource/makefile.*
 samples/resource/*.xbm
 samples/resource/*.xpm
 samples/resource/*.ico
 samples/animate/*.cpp
 samples/animate/*.h
 samples/animate/*.def
-samples/animate/makefile*.*
+samples/animate/makefile.*
 samples/animate/*.xbm
 samples/animate/*.xpm
 samples/animate/*.ico
 samples/animate/*.rc
 samples/mdi/*.cpp
 samples/mdi/*.h
 samples/mdi/*.def
-samples/mdi/makefile*.*
+samples/mdi/makefile.*
 samples/mdi/*.xbm
 samples/mdi/*.xpm
 samples/mdi/*.ico
 samples/mdi/*.rc
 samples/mdi/bitmaps/*.bmp
@@ -296,18 +275,16 @@ samples/mdi/bitmaps/*.ico
 samples/minimal/*.cpp
 samples/minimal/*.h
 samples/minimal/*.def
-samples/minimal/makefile*.*
+samples/minimal/makefile.*
 samples/minimal/*.xbm
 samples/minimal/*.xpm
 samples/minimal/*.ico
 samples/minimal/*.rc
 samples/controls/*.cpp
 samples/controls/*.h
 samples/controls/*.def
-samples/controls/makefile*.*
+samples/controls/makefile.*
 samples/controls/*.xbm
 samples/controls/*.xpm
 samples/controls/*.ico
 samples/controls/*.bmp
 samples/controls/*.rc
@@ -315,55 +292,73 @@ samples/controls/*.rc
 samples/fractal/*.cpp
 samples/fractal/*.h
 samples/fractal/*.def
-samples/fractal/makefile*.*
+samples/fractal/makefile.*
 samples/fractal/*.xbm
 samples/fractal/*.xpm
 samples/fractal/*.ico
 samples/fractal/*.rc
 samples/layout/*.cpp
 samples/layout/*.h
 samples/layout/*.def
-samples/layout/makefile*.*
+samples/layout/makefile.*
 samples/layout/*.xbm
 samples/layout/*.xpm
 samples/layout/*.ico
 samples/layout/*.rc
 samples/layout/*.bmp
 samples/layout/*.xpm
 samples/printing/*.cpp
 samples/printing/*.h
 samples/printing/*.def
-samples/printing/makefile*.*
+samples/printing/makefile.*
 samples/printing/*.xbm
 samples/printing/*.xpm
 samples/printing/*.txt
 samples/printing/*.ico
 samples/printing/*.bmp
 samples/printing/*.rc
 samples/printing/*.afm
-samples/toolbar/*.cpp
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.cpp
-samples/toolbar/*.h
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.h
-samples/toolbar/*.def
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.def
-samples/toolbar/makefile*.*
+samples/tbarsmpl/makefile.*
-samples/toolbar/*.txt
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.txt
-samples/toolbar/*.xbm
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.xbm
-samples/toolbar/*.xpm
+samples/tbarsmpl/bitmaps/*.xbm
-samples/toolbar/bitmaps/*.xbm
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.ico
-samples/toolbar/bitmaps/*.xpm
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.bmp
-samples/toolbar/*.ico
+samples/tbarsmpl/*.rc
-samples/toolbar/*.bmp
+samples/tbarsmpl/bitmaps/*.bmp
-samples/toolbar/*.rc
+
-samples/toolbar/bitmaps/*.bmp
+samples/tbar95/*.cpp
 samples/tbar95/*.h
 samples/tbar95/*.def
 samples/tbar95/makefile.*
 samples/tbar95/*.txt
 samples/tbar95/*.xbm
 samples/tbar95/bitmaps/*.xbm
 samples/tbar95/*.ico
 samples/tbar95/*.bmp
 samples/tbar95/*.rc
 samples/tbar95/bitmaps/*.bmp
 samples/tbarmsw/*.cpp
 samples/tbarmsw/*.h
 samples/tbarmsw/*.def
 samples/tbarmsw/makefile.*
 samples/tbarmsw/*.txt
 samples/tbarmsw/*.xbm
 samples/tbarmsw/bitmaps/*.xbm
 samples/tbarmsw/*.ico
 samples/tbarmsw/*.bmp
 samples/tbarmsw/*.rc
 samples/tbarmsw/bitmaps/*.bmp
 samples/docview/*.h
 samples/docview/*.cpp
 samples/docview/*.def
 samples/docview/*.rc
-samples/docview/makefile*.*
+samples/docview/makefile.*
 samples/docview/*.xbm
 samples/docview/*.xpm
 samples/docview/*.txt
 samples/docview/*.ico
 samples/docview/*.bmp
@@ -372,9 +367,8 @@ samples/memcheck/*.h
 samples/memcheck/*.cpp
 samples/memcheck/*.def
 samples/memcheck/*.rc
-samples/memcheck/makefile*.*
+samples/memcheck/makefile.*
 samples/memcheck/*.xbm
 samples/memcheck/*.xpm
 samples/memcheck/*.txt
 samples/memcheck/*.ico
 samples/memcheck/*.bmp
@@ -383,22 +377,21 @@ samples/odbc/*.h
 samples/odbc/*.cpp
 samples/odbc/*.def
 samples/odbc/*.rc
-samples/odbc/makefile*.*
+samples/odbc/makefile.*
 samples/odbc/*.inf
 samples/odbc/*.xbm
 samples/odbc/*.xpm
 samples/odbc/*.ico
 samples/odbc/*.bmp
 samples/odbc/*.dbf
 samples/odbc/*.cdx
 samples/odbc/odbc32.lib
 samples/dialogs/*.h
 samples/dialogs/*.cpp
 samples/dialogs/*.def
 samples/dialogs/*.rc
-samples/dialogs/makefile*.*
+samples/dialogs/makefile.*
 samples/dialogs/*.xbm
 samples/dialogs/*.xpm
 samples/dialogs/*.txt
 samples/dialogs/*.bmp
 samples/dialogs/*.ico
@@ -409,9 +402,8 @@ samples/wxpoem/*.def
 samples/wxpoem/*.rc
 samples/wxpoem/*.inf
 samples/wxpoem/*.txt
-samples/wxpoem/makefile*.*
+samples/wxpoem/makefile.*
 samples/wxpoem/*.xbm
 samples/wxpoem/*.xpm
 samples/wxpoem/*.ico
 samples/wxpoem/*.bmp
 samples/wxpoem/*.dat
@@ -423,9 +415,8 @@ samples/pressup/*.def
 samples/pressup/*.rc
 samples/pressup/*.inf
 samples/pressup/*.txt
-samples/pressup/makefile*.*
+samples/pressup/makefile.*
 samples/pressup/*.xbm
 samples/pressup/*.xpm
 samples/pressup/*.ico
 samples/pressup/*.bmp
@@ -435,9 +426,8 @@ samples/validate/*.def
 samples/validate/*.rc
 samples/validate/*.inf
 samples/validate/*.txt
-samples/validate/makefile*.*
+samples/validate/makefile.*
 samples/validate/*.xbm
 samples/validate/*.xpm
 samples/validate/*.ico
 samples/validate/*.bmp
@@ -447,9 +437,8 @@ samples/events/*.def
 samples/events/*.rc
 samples/events/*.inf
 samples/events/*.txt
-samples/events/makefile*.*
+samples/events/makefile.*
 samples/events/*.xbm
 samples/events/*.xpm
 samples/events/*.ico
 samples/events/*.bmp
@@ -458,11 +447,9 @@ samples/treectrl/*.h
 samples/treectrl/*.def
 samples/treectrl/*.rc
 samples/treectrl/*.txt
-samples/treectrl/makefile*.*
+samples/treectrl/makefile.*
 samples/treectrl/*.xbm
 samples/treectrl/*.xpm
 samples/treectrl/bitmaps/*.xbm
 samples/treectrl/bitmaps/*.xpm
 samples/treectrl/*.ico
 samples/treectrl/*.bmp
 samples/treectrl/bitmaps/*.bmp
@@ -473,11 +460,9 @@ samples/listctrl/*.h
 samples/listctrl/*.def
 samples/listctrl/*.rc
 samples/listctrl/*.txt
-samples/listctrl/makefile*.*
+samples/listctrl/makefile.*
 samples/listctrl/*.xbm
 samples/listctrl/*.xpm
 samples/listctrl/bitmaps/*.xbm
 samples/listctrl/bitmaps/*.xpm
 samples/listctrl/*.ico
 samples/listctrl/*.bmp
 samples/listctrl/bitmaps/*.bmp
@@ -488,9 +473,8 @@ samples/splitter/*.h
 samples/splitter/*.def
 samples/splitter/*.rc
 samples/splitter/*.txt
-samples/splitter/makefile*.*
+samples/splitter/makefile.*
 samples/splitter/*.xbm
 samples/splitter/*.xpm
 samples/splitter/*.ico
 samples/splitter/*.bmp
@@ -499,9 +483,8 @@ samples/grid/*.h
 samples/grid/*.def
 samples/grid/*.rc
 samples/grid/*.txt
-samples/grid/makefile*.*
+samples/grid/makefile.*
 samples/grid/*.xbm
 samples/grid/*.xpm
 samples/grid/*.ico
 samples/grid/*.bmp
@@ -510,9 +493,8 @@ samples/internat/*.h
 samples/internat/*.def
 samples/internat/*.rc
 samples/internat/*.txt
-samples/internat/makefile*.*
+samples/internat/makefile.*
 samples/internat/*.xbm
 samples/internat/*.xpm
 samples/internat/*.po
 samples/internat/*.ico
 samples/internat/*.bmp
@@ -523,42 +505,35 @@ samples/checklst/*.h
 samples/checklst/*.def
 samples/checklst/*.rc
 samples/checklst/*.txt
-samples/checklst/makefile*.*
+samples/checklst/makefile.*
 samples/checklst/*.xbm
 samples/checklst/*.xpm
 samples/checklst/*.ico
 samples/checklst/*.bmp
 samples/dnd/*.cpp
 samples/dnd/*.h
-samples/dnd/makefile*.*
+samples/dnd/makefile.*
 samples/dnd/*.rc
 samples/dnd/*.def
 samples/dnd/*.bmp
 samples/dnd/*.xbm
 samples/dnd/*.xpm
 samples/dnd/*.ico
 samples/dnd/*.txt
 samples/tab/*.cpp
 samples/tab/*.h
-samples/tab/makefile*.*
+samples/tab/makefile.*
 samples/tab/*.rc
 samples/tab/*.def
 samples/tab/*.bmp
 samples/tab/*.xbm
 samples/tab/*.xpm
 samples/tab/*.ico
 samples/tab/*.txt
 samples/png/*.cpp
 samples/png/*.h
-samples/png/makefile*.*
+samples/png/makefile.*
 samples/png/*.rc
 samples/png/*.def
 samples/png/*.bmp
 samples/png/*.xpm
 samples/png/*.xbm
 samples/png/*.ico
 samples/png/*.txt
 samples/png/*.png
--- a/distrib/msw/gtk.rsp
+++ b/distrib/msw/gtk.rsp
@@ -1,69 +0,0 @@
 install-sh
 Makefile
 template.mak
 TODO.txt
 docs/gtk/*.html
 src/mkdirs
 src/Makefile
 src/Makefile.in
 src/*.inc
 src/gtk/*.cpp
 src/gtk/*.c
 src/gtk/*.inc
 src/gtk/*.xbm
 src/gtk/setup/*.hin
 src/gtk/setup/*.in
 src/gtk/setup/rules/*
 src/gtk/setup/rules/generic/*
 src/gtk/setup/rules/linux/*
 src/gdk_imlib/*.c
 src/gdk_imlib/*.h
 src/gdk_imlib/AUTHORS
 src/gdk_imlib/AUDIT
 src/gdk_imlib/COPYING.LIB
 src/gdk_imlib/README
 src/gdk_imlib/ChangeLog
 src/iodbc/*.c
 src/iodbc/*.ci
 src/iodbc/*.h
 src/iodbc/IAFA-PACKAGE
 src/iodbc/README
 src/iodbc/*.exp
 src/iodbc/*.mk
 src/iodbc/autoconfig
 src/iodbc/build
 src/iodbc/Changes.log
 src/iodbc/postgres/*.h
 install/gtk/*
 misc/afm/*
 misc/gs_afm/*
 misc/imlib/*
 user/Makefile
 user/wxConvert/*.cpp
 user/wxConvert/*.h
 user/wxConvert/Makefile
 user/wxConvert/Makefile.in
 user/wxFile/*.cpp
 user/wxFile/*.h
 user/wxFile/Makefile
 user/wxFile/Makefile.in
 user/wxFile/*.xpm
 user/wxTest/*.cpp
 user/wxTest/*.h
 user/wxTest/Makefile
 user/wxTest/Makefile.in
 user/wxTest/*.xpm
 user/wxTest/*.png
--- a/distrib/msw/msw.rsp
+++ b/distrib/msw/msw.rsp
@@ -1,5 +1,4 @@
 docs/msw/*.txt
 docs/licence.txt
 src/makeb32.env
 src/makebcc.env
--- a/distrib/msw/zipdist.bat
+++ b/distrib/msw/zipdist.bat
@@ -1,29 +1,27 @@
@echo off
 rem Zip up an external, generic + Windows distribution of wxWindows 2.0
-set src=d:\wx2\wxWindows
+if "%1" == "" goto usage
-set dest=%src\deliver
+if "%2" == "" goto usage
 if "%src" == "" goto usage
 if "%dest" == "" goto usage
 echo About to archive an external wxWindows distribution:
-echo   From   %src
+echo   From   %1
-echo   To     %dest\wx200gen.zip, %dest\wx200doc.zip, %dest\wx200msw.zip, %dest\wx200ps.zip, %dest\wx200hlp.zip, %dest\wx200htm.zip, %dest\wx200pdf.zip
+echo   To     %2\wx200gen.zip, %2\wx200doc.zip, %2\wx200msw.zip, %2\wx200ps.zip, %2\wx200hlp.zip, %2\wx200htm.zip, %2\wx200pdf.zip
 echo CTRL-C if this is not correct.
 pause
-erase %dest\wx200*.zip
+erase %2\wx200*.zip
-cd %src
+cd %1
 echo Zipping...
-zip32 -@ %dest\wx200gen.zip < %src\distrib\msw\generic.rsp
+zip32 -@ %2\wx200gen.zip < %1\distrib\msw\generic.rsp
-zip32 -@ %dest\wx200msw.zip < %src\distrib\msw\msw.rsp
+zip32 -@ %2\wx200msw.zip < %1\distrib\msw\msw.rsp
-zip32 -@ %dest\wx200gtk.zip < %src\distrib\msw\gtk.rsp
+zip32 -@ %2\wx200doc.zip < %1\distrib\msw\docsrc.rsp
 zip32 -@ %dest\wx200doc.zip < %src\distrib\msw\docsrc.rsp
-zip32 -@ %dest\wx200hlp.zip < %src\distrib\msw\wx_hlp.rsp
+rem zip32 -@ %2\wx200ps.zip < %1\distrib\msw\wx_ps.rsp
-zip32 -@ %dest\wx200htm.zip < %src\distrib\msw\wx_html.rsp
+zip32 -@ %2\wx200hlp.zip < %1\distrib\msw\wx_hlp.rsp
-zip32 -@ %dest\wx200pdf.zip < %src\distrib\msw\wx_pdf.rsp
+zip32 -@ %2\wx200htm.zip < %1\distrib\msw\wx_html.rsp
 zip32 -@ %2\wx200pdf.zip < %1\distrib\msw\wx_pdf.rsp
-cd %dest
+cd %2
 echo wxWindows archived.
 goto end
--- a/docs/latex/porting/porting.hpj
+++ b/docs/latex/porting/porting.hpj
@@ -1,4 +1,5 @@
 [OPTIONS]
 BMROOT=d:\wx2\wxwind~1\docs\latex\porting ; Assume that bitmaps are where the source is
 TITLE=wxWindows Porting Guide
 CONTENTS=Contents
 COMPRESS=HIGH
--- a/docs/latex/porting/tex2rtf.ini
+++ b/docs/latex/porting/tex2rtf.ini
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ headerRule = yes
 footerRule = yes
 useHeadingStyles = yes
 listItemIndent=40
-generateHPJ = no
+generateHPJ = yes
 htmlBrowseButtons = bitmap
 winHelpContents = yes
 winHelpVersion = 3 ; 3 for Windows 3.x, 4 for Windows 95
--- a/docs/latex/wx/bbutton.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/bbutton.tex
@@ -30,14 +30,6 @@ provided bitmaps.}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_BUTTON(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_BUTTON\_CLICKED event,
 when the button is clicked.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxButton}{wxbutton}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/body.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/body.tex
@@ -6,14 +6,14 @@
 \section{What is wxWindows?}
 wxWindows is a C++ framework providing GUI (Graphical User
-Interface) and other facilities on more than one platform.  Version 2.0 currently
+Interface) and other facilities on more than one platform.  It currently
-supports subsets MS Windows (16-bit, Windows 95 and Windows NT) and GTK.
+supports subsets of Motif, Xt and MS Windows (16-bit, Windows 95 and Windows NT).
 wxWindows was originally developed at the Artificial Intelligence
 Applications Institute, University of Edinburgh, for internal use.
 wxWindows has been released into the public domain in the hope
 that others will also find it useful. Version 2.0 is written and
-maintained by Julian Smart, Robert Roebling and others.
+maintained by Julian Smart and Markus Holzem, with support from users.
 This manual discusses wxWindows in the context of multi-platform
 development.\helpignore{For more detail on the wxWindows version 2.0 API
@@ -55,8 +55,8 @@ that are often indistinguishable from those produced using single-platform
 toolkits
 such as Motif and MFC.
-wxWindows 2.0 currently maps to two native APIs: GTK and
+wxWindows 2.0 currently maps to two native APIs: Motif and
-MS Windows. Motif, Xt and Mac ports are also in preparation.
+MS Windows. An Xt port is also in preparation.
 The importance of using a platform-independent class library cannot be
 overstated, since GUI application development is very time-consuming,
@@ -79,17 +79,17 @@ here are some of the benefits:
 \item Low cost (free, in fact!)
 \item You get the source.
 \item Several example programs.
-\item Over 700 pages of printable and on-line documentation.
+\item Over 200 pages of printable and on-line documentation.
 \item Simple-to-use, object-oriented API.
 \item Graphics calls include splines, polylines, rounded rectangles, etc.
 \item Constraint-based layout option.
 \item Print/preview and document/view architectures.
 \item Status line facility, toolbar
-\item Easy, object-oriented interprocess comms (DDE subset) under Unix and
+\item Easy, object-oriented interprocess comms (DDE subset) under UNIX and
 MS Windows.
-\item Encapsulated PostScript generation under Unix, normal MS Windows printing on the
+\item Encapsulated PostScript generation under UNIX, normal MS Windows printing on the
 PC.
-\item MDI support under Windows and GTK.
+\item MDI support under Windows.
 \item Can be used to create DLLs under Windows, dynamic libraries on the Sun.
 \item Common dialogs for file browsing, printing, colour selection, etc.
 \item Under MS Windows, support for creating metafiles and copying
@@ -171,16 +171,18 @@ following setups.
 \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
 \item A 486 or higher PC running MS Windows.
-\item One of Microsoft Visual C++ 4.0 or higher, Borland C++, Gnu-Win32.
+\item One of Microsoft Visual C++, Borland C++, Watcom C++, MetroWerks C++,
-\item At least 60 MB of disk space.
+Symantec C++, GNU-WIN32.
 \item At least 30 MB of disk space.
 \end{enumerate}
-(b) Unix:
+(b) UNIX:
 \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
 \item Almost any C++ compiler, including GNU C++.
-\item Almost any Unix workstation, and GTK 1.0 or higher.
+\item Almost any UNIX workstation (VMS is supported too) and Motif 1.2 or higher (not necessary
-\item At least 60 MB of disk space.
+for the Xt version)
 \item At least 30 MB of disk space.
 \end{enumerate}
 \section{Availability and location of wxWindows}
@@ -195,26 +197,35 @@ Applications Institute by anonymous FTP and World Wide Web:
 \section{Acknowledgments}
-Thanks are due to AIAI for being willing to release the original version of
+Thanks are due to the AIAI for being willing to release wxWindows into
-wxWindows into the public domain, and to our patient wives Harriet, Tanja and others.
+the public domain, and to our patient wives Harriet and Tanja.
-We would particularly like to thank the following for their contributions to wxWindows, and the many others who have been involved in
+The Internet has been an essential prop when coming up against tricky
-the project over the years. Apologies for any unintentional omissions from this list. 
+problems. Thanks to those who answered our
- 
+queries or submitted bug fixes and enhancements; wxWindows is very
-Yiorgos Adamopoulos, Jamshid Afshar, Alejandro Aguilar-Sierra, AIAI, Patrick Albert, Karsten Ballueder, Michael Bedward, Kai Bendorf, Yura Bidus, Keith 
+much a team effort.
-Gary Boyce, Chris Breeze, Pete Britton, Ian Brown, C. Buckley, Dmitri Chubraev, Robin Corbet, Cecil Coupe, Andrew Davison, Neil Dudman, Robin 
+
-Dunn, Hermann Dunkel, Jos van Eijndhoven, Tom Felici, Thomas Fettig, Matthew Flatt, Pasquale Foggia, Josep Fortiana, Todd Fries, Dominic Gallagher, 
+Hermann Dunkel contributed XPM support; Arthur Seaton wrote the memory
-Wolfram Gloger, Norbert Grotz, Stefan Gunter, Bill Hale, Patrick Halke, Stefan Hammes, Guillaume Helle, Harco de Hilster, Cord Hockemeyer, Markus 
+checking code; Olaf Klein and Patrick Halke wrote the ODBC classes;
-Holzem, Olaf Klein, Leif Jensen, Bart Jourquin, Guilhem Lavaux, Jan Lessner, Nicholas Liebmann, Torsten Liermann, Per Lindqvist, Thomas Runge, Tatu
+Harri Pasanen and Robin Dunn wrote wxPython and contributed to the
-M\"{a}nnist\"{o}, Scott Maxwell, Thomas Myers, Oliver Niedung, Hernan Otero, Ian Perrigo, Timothy Peters, Giordano Pezzoli, Harri Pasanen, Thomaso Paoletti, 
+wxExtend library.
-Garrett Potts, Marcel Rasche, Robert Roebling, Dino Scaringella, Jobst Schmalenbach, Arthur Seaton, Paul Shirley, Stein Somers, Petr Smilauer, Neil Smith, 
+
-Kari Syst\"{a}, Arthur Tetzlaff-Deas, Jonathan Tonberg, Jyrki Tuomi, Janos Vegh, Andrea Venturoli, Vadim Zeitlin, Xiaokun Zhu, Edward Zimmermann.
+Markus Holzem write the Xt port. Jonathan Tonberg, Bill Hale,
 Cecil Coupe, Thomaso Paoletti, Thomas Fettig, and others slaved away
 writing the Mac port.  Keith Gary Boyce ported wxWindows to the free
 GNU-WIN32 compiler, refusing to give up when shortcuts were suggested.
 Many thanks also to: Timothy Peters, Jamshid Afshar, Patrick Albert, C. Buckley,
 Robin Corbet, Harco de Hilster, Josep Fortiana, Torsten Liermann, Tatu
 M\"{a}nnist\"{o}, Ian Perrigo, Giordano Pezzoli, Petr Smilauer, Neil Smith,
 Kari Syst\"{a}, Jyrki Tuomi, Edward Zimmermann, Ian Brown, and many
 others.
 `Graphplace', the basis for the wxGraphLayout library, is copyright Dr. Jos
 T.J. van Eijndhoven of Eindhoven University of Technology. The code has
 been used in wxGraphLayout with his permission.
-We also acknowledge the author of XFIG, the excellent Unix drawing tool,
+We also acknowledge the author of XFIG, the excellent UNIX drawing tool,
 from the source of which we have borrowed some spline drawing code.
 His copyright is included below.
@@ -239,7 +250,7 @@ changes.txt for differences between versions.
 \section{Include files}
-The main include file is {\tt "wx/wx.h"}; this includes the most commonly
+The main include file is {\tt "wx.h"}; this includes the most commonly
 used modules of wxWindows.
 To save on compilation time, include only those header files relevant to the
@@ -248,26 +259,25 @@ the following section before any other includes:
 \begin{verbatim}
 // For compilers that support precompilation, includes "wx.h".
-#include <wx/wxprec.h>
+#include "wx_prec.h"
 #ifdef __BORLANDC__
 #pragma hdrstop
 #endif
 #ifndef WX_PRECOMP
-// Include your minimal set of headers here, or wx.h
+... include minimum set of files necessary here ...
 #include <wx/wx.h>
 #endif
 ... now your other include files ...
 \end{verbatim}
-The file {\tt "wx/wxprec.h"} includes {\tt "wx/wx.h"}. Although this incantation
+The file {\tt "wx\_prec.h"} includes {\tt "wx.h"}. Although this incantation
 may seem quirky, it is in fact the end result of a lot of experimentation,
 and several Windows compilers to use precompilation (those tested are Microsoft Visual C++, Borland C++
 and Watcom C++).
-Borland precompilation is largely automatic. Visual C++ requires specification of {\tt "wx/wxprec.h"} as
+Borland precompilation is largely automatic. Visual C++ requires specification of {\tt "wx\_prec.h"} as
 the file to use for precompilation. Watcom C++ is automatic apart from the specification of
 the .pch file. Watcom C++ is strange in requiring the precompiled header to be used only for
 object files compiled in the same directory as that in which the precompiled header was created.
@@ -277,14 +287,14 @@ multi-megabyte .pch files.
 \section{Libraries}
-Please the wxGTK documentation for use of the Unix version of wxWindows.
+Under UNIX, use the library libwx\_motif.a
-Under Windows, use the library wx.lib for stand-alone Windows
+(Motif).  Under Windows, use the library wx.lib for stand-alone Windows
 applications, or wxdll.lib for creating DLLs.
 \section{Configuration}
 The following lists the options configurable in the file
-\rtfsp{\tt "wx/msw/setup.h"} and {\tt "wx/gtk/setup.h"} Some settings are a matter
+\rtfsp{\tt include/base/wx\_setup.h.} Some settings are a matter
 of taste, some help with platform-specific problems, and
 others can be set to minimize the size of the library.
@@ -296,15 +306,27 @@ others can be set to minimize the size of the library.
 \twocolitem{USE\_DOC\_VIEW\_ARCHITECTURE}{If 1, wxDocument, wxView and related classes are compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_DYNAMIC\_CLASSES}{If 1, the run-time class macros and classes are compiled. Recommended,
 and necessary for the document/view framework.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_EXTENDED\_STATICS}{If 1, wxStaticItem code is compiled for enhanced panel decorative items.
 Not rigorously tested, and not documented.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_HELP}{If 1, interface to help system is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_GAUGE}{If 1, the wxGauge class compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_GLOBAL\_MEMORY\_OPERATORS}{If 1, redefines global new and delete operators to be compatible
 with the extended arguments of the debugging wxObject new and delete operators. If this causes problems
 for your compiler, set to 0.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_GNU\_WXSTRING}{If 1, the enhanced GNU wxString and regular expression class are compiled
 in place of the normal wxString class. See contrib/wxstring for details.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_IMAGE\_LOADING\_IN\_MSW}{Use code to allow dynamic .BMP loading
 under MS Windows.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_IMAGE\_LOADING\_IN\_X}{Use code in utils/image to allow dynamic .BMP/.GIF loading
 under X.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_RESOURCE\_LOADING\_IN\_MSW}{Use code to allow dynamic .ICO/.CUR loading
 under MS Windows.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_IPC}{If 1, interprocess communication code is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_MEMORY\_TRACING}{If 1, enables debugging versions of wxObject::new and wxObject::delete
 if the value of DEBUG is defined to more than 0.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_METAFILE}{If 1, Windows Metafile code is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_PANEL\_IN\_PANEL}{If 1, experimental panel-in-panel code is used
 for common dialog boxes. Not recommended, since tab traversal can suffer.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_POSTSCRIPT}{If 1, PostScript code is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_POSTSCRIPT\_ARCHITECTURE\_IN\_MSW}{Set to 1 to enable the printing architecture
 to make use of either native Windows printing facilities, or the wxPostScriptDC class depending
@@ -312,7 +334,32 @@ on the wxApp::SetPrintMode setting.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_PRINTING\_ARCHITECTURE}{If 1, wxPrinter, wxPrintout and related classes are compiled
 for the print/preview framework.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_RESOURCES}{If 1, win.ini or .Xdefaults-style resource read/write code is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_SCROLLBAR}{If 1, wxScrollBar class is compiled. Not rigorously tested, and not documented.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_SPLINES}{If 1, spline code is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_TOOLBAR}{If 1, the wxToolBar class is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_TYPEDEFS}{If 1, a typedef will be used for wxPoint instead of
 a class declaration, to reduce overhead and avoid a Microsoft C++ memory bug.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_VLBOX}{If 1, wxVirtListBox code is compiled for a virtual listbox item.
 Not rigorously tested, and not documented.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_WX\_RESOURCES}{If 1, wxWindows resource file (.WXR) code is compiled.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_XFIG\_SPLINE\_CODE}{If 1, XFig-derived code is used for spline
 drawing. If 0, AIAI code is used, which is slower.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_XPM\_IN\_X}{If 1, XPM (colour pixmap) facilities will be compiled and used
 in wxBitmap under X.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_XPM\_IN\_MSW}{If 1, XPM (colour pixmap) facilities will be compiled and used
 in wxBitmap under MS Windows.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \subsection{X features}
 \begin{twocollist}
 \twocolitem{DEFAULT\_FILE\_SELECTOR\_SIZE}{Let Motif choose the size of
 XmFileSelectionBox. Otherwise, size is 500x600.}
 \twocolitem{PIXEL0\_DISABLE}{Define to disallow allocation of pixel 0 (wxXOR problem).}
 \twocolitem{USE\_GADGETS}{Use gadgets where possible rather than Widgets for items.
 Default is to use Gadgets.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_BUTTON\_GADGET}{Use gadgets for buttons. This can intefere with
 default button selection, so the default is zero.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \subsection{Windows and NT features}
@@ -326,17 +373,18 @@ directory, ctl3d.h into an include directory, and ctl3dv2.dll into
 windows/system). You may need to find a compiler-specific version of ctl3dv2.lib
 or ctl3d32.lib. Define CTL3D to be 1 in wx\_setup.h and link your executables with ctl3dv2.lib
 or ctl3d32.lib.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_ITSY\_BITSY}{If 1, compiles in code to support tiny window titlebars.}
 \twocolitem{USE\_ODBC}{If 1, compiles wxDatabase and wxRecordSet classes for ODBC
 access. Requires sql.h, sqlext.h files if set to 1 (see topic on database support).}
 \end{twocollist}
 \section{Makefiles}
-At the moment there is no attempt to make Unix makefiles and
+At the moment there is no attempt to make UNIX makefiles and
 PC makefiles compatible, i.e. one makefile is required for
 each environment.
-Sample makefiles for Unix (suffix .UNX), MS C++ (suffix .DOS and .NT), Borland
+Sample makefiles for UNIX (suffix .UNX), MS C++ (suffix .DOS and .NT), Borland
 C++ (.BCC) and Symantec C++ (.SC) are included for the library, demos
 and utilities. The NT, Borland and Symantec makefiles cannot be
 guaranteed to be up-to-date since the author does not have
@@ -355,12 +403,12 @@ FINAL=1 on the command line to remove debugging information (this only
 really necessary at the link stage), and DLL=1 to make a DLL version of
 the library, if building a library.
-\subsection{Unix makefiles}
+\subsection{UNIX makefiles}
 TODO.
 Debugging information is included by default; you may add DEBUG= as an
-argument to make to compile without it, or use the Unix {\bf strip}
+argument to make to compile without it, or use the UNIX {\bf strip}
 command to remove debugging information from an executable.
 \normalbox{{\it Important note:} Most compiler flags are kept centrally in
@@ -378,7 +426,7 @@ The least that must be defined in the Windows resource file (extension RC)
 is the following statement:
 \begin{verbatim}
-rcinclude "wx/msw/wx.rc"
+rcinclude wx.rc
 \end{verbatim}
 which includes essential internal wxWindows definitions.  The resource script
@@ -397,8 +445,7 @@ as the Program Manager) find your application icon first.}
 \subsection{Module definition file}
-A module definition file (extension DEF) is required for 16-bit applications, and
+A module definition file (extension DEF) looks like the following:
 looks like the following:
 \begin{verbatim}
 NAME         Hello
@@ -414,6 +461,46 @@ STACKSIZE    8192
 The only lines which will usually have to be changed per application are
 NAME and DESCRIPTION.
 \section{Memory models and memory allocation}\label{memorymodels}
 Under UNIX, memory allocation isn't a problem. Under Windows, the only
 really viable way to go is to use the large model, which uses the global
 heap instead of the local heap for memory allocation. Unless more than
 one read-write data segment is used,% (see \helpref{large data}{largedata}
 large model programs may still have multiple instances under MS
 C/C++ 7. Microsoft give the following guidelines for producing
 multiple-instance large model programs:
 \begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
 \item Do not use {\tt /ND} to name extra data segments unless the segment is READONLY.
 \item Use the .DEF file to mark extra data segments READONLY.
 \item Do not use \_\_far or FAR to mark data items.
 \item Use {\tt /PACKDATA} to combine data segments.
 \item Use {\tt /Gt65500 /Gx} to force all data into the default data segment.
 \end{itemize}
 Even with the single-instance limitation, the productivity benefit is
 worth it in the majority of cases. Note that some other multi-platform
 class libraries also have this restriction. (If more than one instance
 really is required, create several copies of the program with different
 names.)
 Having chosen the large model, just use C++ `new', `delete' (and if
 necessary `malloc' and `free') in the normal way. The only restrictions
 now encountered are a maximum of 64 KB for a single program segment and
 for a single data item, unless huge model is selected.
 For Borland users, use the data threshold switch, and the following is
 also recommended:
 \begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
 \item Check ``Automatic Far Data Segments"
 \item Check ``Put Constant Strings into Code Segment"
 \end{itemize}
 See also the Frequently Asked Questions document for further details
 on using Borland with wxWindows.
 \subsection{Allocating and deleting wxWindows objects}
 In general, classes derived from wxWindow must dynamically allocated
@@ -421,13 +508,17 @@ with {\it new} and deleted with {\it delete}. If you delete a window,
 all of its children and descendants will be automatically deleted,
 so you don't need to delete these descendants explicitly.
-When deleting a frame or dialog, use {\bf Destroy} rather than {\bf delete} so
+Don't statically create a window unless you know that the window
-that the wxWindows delayed deletion can take effect. This waits until idle time
+cannot be deleted dynamically. Modal dialogs, such as those used
-(when all messages have been processed) to actually delete the window, to avoid
+in the {\tt dialogs} sample, can usually be created statically,
-problems associated with the GUI sending events to deleted windows.
+if you know that the OK or Cancel button does not destroy the dialog.
-Don't create a window on the stack, because this will interfere
+Most drawing objects, such as wxPen, wxBrush, wxFont, and wxBitmap, should be
-with delayed deletion.
+created dynamically. They are cleaned up automatically on program exit.
 wxColourMap is an exception to this rule (currently). In particular,
 do not attempt to create these objects globally before OnInit() has a chance
 to be called, because wxWindows might not have done essential internal initialisation
 (including creation of lists containing all instances of wxPen, wxBrush etc.)
 If you decide to allocate a C++ array of objects (such as wxBitmap) that may
 be cleaned up by wxWindows, make sure you delete the array explicitly
@@ -440,10 +531,24 @@ enough for copies to be made.
 Beware of deleting objects such as a wxPen or wxBitmap if they are still in use.
 Windows is particularly sensitive to this: so make sure you
-make calls like wxDC::SetPen(wxNullPen) or wxDC::SelectObject(wxNullBitmap) before deleting
+make calls like wxDC::SetPen(NULL) or wxDC::SelectObject(NULL) before deleting
 a drawing object that may be in use. Code that doesn't do this will probably work
 fine on some platforms, and then fail under Windows.
 \section{Dynamic Link Libraries}
 wxWindows may be used to produce DLLs which run under MS Windows. Note that
 this is not the same thing as having wxWindows as a DLL, which is not
 currently possible. For Microsoft C++, use the makefile with the argument DLL=1 to produce
 a version of the wxWindows library which may be used in a DLL application.
 There is a bug in Microsoft C++ which makes the compiler complain about returned floats,
 which goes away when the {\tt /Os} option is used, which is why that flag is
 set in the makefile.
 For making wxWindows as a Sun dynamic library, there are comments in the
 UNIX makefile for the appropriate flags for AT\&T C++. Sorry, I haven't
 investigated the flags needed for other compilers.
 \section{Conditional compilation}
 One of the purposes of wxWindows is to reduce the need for conditional
@@ -452,69 +557,63 @@ However, sometimes it is necessary to incorporate platform-specific
 features (such as metafile use under MS Windows). The following identifiers
 may be used for this purpose, along with any user-supplied ones:
-{\bf GUIs:}
+\begin{itemize}
 \item {\tt wx\_x} - for code which should work under any X toolkit
 \item {\tt wx\_motif} - for code which should work under Motif only
 \item {\tt wx\_msw} - for code which should work under Microsoft Windows only
 \item {\tt wx\_xt} - for code which should work under Xt only
 \end{itemize}
 For example:
 \begin{verbatim}
-__X__           any X, but not GTK
+  ...
-__WXMOTIF__     Motif
+#ifdef wx_x
-__WXGTK__       GTK
+  (void)wxMessageBox("Sorry, metafiles not available under X.");
-__WXMSW__       Any Windows
+#endif
-__MAC__         MacOS
+#ifdef wx_msw
-__UNIX__        any Unix
+  wxMetaFileDC dc;
-__WIN95__       GUI for Windows 95 and above; NT 4.0 and above.
+  DrawIt(dc);
-__WIN32__       WIN32 API
+  wxMetaFile *mf = dc.Close();
-__NT__          Windows NT
+  mf->SetClipboard();
-__CURSES__      CURSES
+  delete mf;
 #endif
  ...
 \end{verbatim}
-{\bf OSes:}
+\section{Building on-line help}
-\begin{verbatim}
+wxWindows has its own help system from version 1.30: wxHelp. It can be
-__HPUX__
+used to view the wxWindows class library reference, and also to provide
-__SVR4__
+on-line help for your wxWindows applications. The API, made accessible
-__SYSV__
+by including {\tt wx\_help.h}, allows you to load files and display
-__LINUX__
+specific sections, using DDE to communicate between the application and
-__SGI__
+wxHelp.
 __ULTRIX__
 __BSD__
 __VMS__
 __SUN__         Any Sun
 __SUNOS__
 __SOLARIS__
 __ALPHA__
 __AIX__
 __DATA_GENERAL__
 __OSF__
 __FREEBSD__
 \end{verbatim}
-{\bf Compilers:}
+wxHelp files can be marked up by hand from ASCII files within wxHelp,
 or may be generated from other files, as is the case with the wxWindows
 documentation.
-\begin{verbatim}
+It is possible to use the platform-specific help
-__GNUWIN32__    Gnu-Win32 compiler
+system (e.g. WinHelp) instead of wxHelp.
 __DJGPP__       DJGPP
 __GNUG__        Gnu C++ on any platform
 __BORLANDC__    Borland C++
 __WATCOMC__     Watcom C++
 __SYMANTECC__   Symantec C++
 __VISUALC__     VC++
 __SUNCC__
 \end{verbatim}
 {\bf wxWindows modes:}
 \begin{verbatim}
 __WXDEBUG__       usage: #ifdef __DEBUG__ (=> debug mode, else => release)
 \end{verbatim}
 See {\tt install.txt}, the wxHelp documentation (in {\tt
 utils/wxhelp/docs}) and \helpref{wxHelp}{wxhelp} for further details.
 \section{C++ issues}
-The following documents some miscellaneous C++ issues.
+There are cases where a C++ program will compile and run fine under one
 environment, and then fail to compile using a different compiler. Some
 caveats are given below, from experience with the GNU C++ compiler (GCC)
 and MS C/C++ compiler version 7.
 \subsection{Templates}
-wxWindows does not use templates since it is a notoriously unportable feature.
+wxWindows does not use templates for two main reasons: one, it is a
 notoriously unportable feature, and two, the author is irrationally
 suspicious of them and prefers to use casts. More compilers are
 now implementing templates, and so it will probably be safe to use
 them soon without fear of portability problems.
 \subsection{Precompiled headers}
@@ -537,7 +636,7 @@ A related problem is that for compilers that don't have precompiled
 headers, including a lot of header files slows down compilation
 considerably. For this reason, you will find (in the common
 X and Windows parts of the library) conditional
-compilation that under Unix, includes a minimal set of headers;
+compilation that under UNIX, includes a minimal set of headers;
 and when using Visual C++, includes {\tt wx.h}. This should help provide
 the optimal compilation for each compiler, although it is
 biassed towards the precompiled headers facility available
@@ -559,14 +658,14 @@ This has undesirable ramifications for people who have documents of the
 same name in different directories.
 As regards the limitations of DOS 8+3 single-case filenames versus
-unrestricted Unix filenames, the best solution is to use DOS filenames
+unrestricted UNIX filenames, the best solution is to use DOS filenames
 for your application, and also for document filenames {\it if} the user
 is likely to be switching platforms regularly. Obviously this latter
 choice is up to the application user to decide.  Some programs (such as
 YACC and LEX) generate filenames incompatible with DOS; the best
-solution here is to have your Unix makefile rename the generated files
+solution here is to have your UNIX makefile rename the generated files
 to something more compatible before transferring the source to DOS.
-Transferring DOS files to Unix is no problem, of course, apart from EOL
+Transferring DOS files to UNIX is no problem, of course, apart from EOL
 conversion for which there should be a utility available (such as
 dos2unix).
@@ -594,8 +693,7 @@ text to suit the size of window, as WinHelp does, and its input files
 are uncompressed ASCII with some embedded font commands and an .xlp
 extension. Most wxWindows documentation (user manuals and class
 references) is supplied in wxHelp format, and also in Windows Help
-format. The wxWindows 2.0 project will presently use an HTML widget
+format.
 in a new and improved wxHelp implementation, under X.
 Note that an application can be programmed to use Windows Help under
 MS Windows, and wxHelp under X. An alternative help viewer under X is
@@ -666,6 +764,18 @@ first attempt.
 See the separate manual and the directory utils/wxgraph. 
 \section{wxImage}\label{wximage}
 This is a collection of GIF/BMP/XBM bitmap loading and displaying
 routines for X.
 \section{MFUTILS}\label{mfutils}
 A very modest step towards reading Windows metafiles on the
 any platform. Julian Smart's ClockWorks program demonstrates
 how extremely simple metafiles may be read and displayed (in this
 case, to be used as clock hands).
 \section{Colours}\label{coloursampler}
 A colour sampler for viewing colours and their names on each
--- a/docs/latex/wx/button.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/button.tex
@@ -18,14 +18,6 @@ There are no special styles for wxButton.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}%
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_BUTTON(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_BUTTON\_CLICKED event,
 when the button is clicked.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxBitmapButton}{wxbitmapbutton}
@@ -107,7 +99,7 @@ box.
 Under Windows, only dialog box buttons respond to this function.  As
 normal under Windows and Motif, pressing return causes the default button to
 be depressed when the return key is pressed. See also \helpref{wxWindow::SetFocus}{wxwindowsetfocus}\rtfsp
-which sets the keyboard focus for windows and text panel items,\rtfsp
+which sets the keyboard focus for windows and text panel items, \helpref{wxWindow::OnDefaultAction}{wxwindowondefaultaction}\rtfsp
 and \helpref{wxWindow::GetDefaultItem}{wxwindowgetdefaultitem}.
 Note that under Motif, calling this function immediately after
--- a/docs/latex/wx/category.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/category.tex
@@ -32,9 +32,21 @@ The following are a variety of windows that are derived from wxWindow.
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow}}{Window with automatically managed scrollbars}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxSplitterWindow}{wxsplitterwindow}}{Window which can be split vertically or horizontally}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxStatusBar}{wxstatusbar}}{Implements the status bar on a frame}
-\twocolitem{\helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar}}{Toolbar class}
+\twocolitem{\helpref{wxStatusBar95}{wxstatusbar95}}{Implements a Windows 95 status bar on a frame}
-\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTabbedPanel}{wxtabbedpanel}}{Tabbed panel (to be replaced with wxNotebook)}
+\twocolitem{\helpref{wxTabbedPanel}{wxtabbedpanel}}{Tabbed panel}
-\twocolitem{\helpref{wxNotebook}{wxnotebook}}{Notebook class (undocumented)}
+\end{twocollist}
 {\large {\bf Toolbar classes}}
 \overview{Overview}{wxtoolbaroverview}
 These are the toolbar classes.
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}}{Toolbar base class}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple}}{A simple, cross-platform toolbar class}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxToolBarMSW}{wxtoolbarmsw}}{A Windows-only toolbar class}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxToolBar95}{wxtoolbar95}}{A Windows 95-only toolbar class}
 \end{twocollist}
 {\large {\bf Common dialogs}}
@@ -319,7 +331,6 @@ product.
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxTimer}{wxtimer}}{Timer class}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxSystemSettings}{wxsystemsettings}}{System settings class}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxWinHelpController}{wxwinhelpcontroller}}{Controls WinHelp instances}
 \twocolitem{\helpref{wxConfig}{wxconfigbase}}{Classes for configuration reading/writing}
 \end{twocollist}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/checkbox.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/checkbox.tex
@@ -16,17 +16,9 @@ There are no special styles for wxCheckBox.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CHECKBOX(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_CHECKBOX\_CLICKED event,
 when the checkbox is clicked.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxRadioButton}{wxradiobutton}, \helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent}
+\helpref{wxRadioButton}{wxradiobutton}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/choice.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/choice.tex
@@ -17,18 +17,9 @@ There are no special styles for wxChoice.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_CHOICE(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_CHOICE\_SELECTED event,
 when an item on the list is selected.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxListBox}{wxlistbox}, \helpref{wxComboBox}{wxcombobox},
+\helpref{wxListBox}{wxlistbox}
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/clasinfo.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/clasinfo.tex
@@ -10,7 +10,8 @@ No parent class.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{Overview}{wxclassinfooverview}, \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
+\overview{Overview}{wxclassinfooverview}\\
 \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/classes.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/classes.tex
@@ -46,12 +46,11 @@ $$\image{14cm;0cm}{wxclass.ps}$$
 \input cmdevent.tex
 \input cmdproc.tex
 \input conditn.tex
 \input config.tex
 \input control.tex
 \input cursor.tex
 \input database.tex
 \input date.tex
-\input datstrm.tex
+\input datstream.tex
 \input dc.tex
 \input ddeclint.tex
 \input ddeconn.tex
@@ -62,8 +61,6 @@ $$\image{14cm;0cm}{wxclass.ps}$$
 \input document.tex
 \input docchfrm.tex
 \input docmanag.tex
 \input docmdich.tex
 \input docmdipr.tex
 \input docprfrm.tex
 \input doctempl.tex
 \input dropevt.tex
@@ -97,7 +94,6 @@ $$\image{14cm;0cm}{wxclass.ps}$$
 \input listbox.tex
 \input listctrl.tex
 \input listevt.tex
 % \input log.tex
 \input mask.tex
 \input mdi.tex
 \input menu.tex
@@ -148,7 +144,7 @@ $$\image{14cm;0cm}{wxclass.ps}$$
 \input statbox.tex
 \input stattext.tex
 \input statusbr.tex
-\input wxstring.tex
+%\input wxstring.tex
 \input strlist.tex
 \input sysclevt.tex
 \input settings.tex
@@ -176,8 +172,3 @@ $$\image{14cm;0cm}{wxclass.ps}$$
 \input function.tex
 %%% Local Variables: 
 %%% mode: latex
 %%% TeX-master: "referenc"
 %%% End: 
--- a/docs/latex/wx/cmdevent.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/cmdevent.tex
@@ -27,7 +27,7 @@ which is generated by a wxCheckBox control.}
 which is generated by a wxChoice control.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LISTBOX(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_LISTBOX\_SELECTED command,
 which is generated by a wxListBox control.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LISTBOX\_DCLICK(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_LISTBOX\_DOUBLECLICKED command,
+\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LISTBOX_DCLICK(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_LISTBOX\_DOUBLECLICKED command,
 which is generated by a wxListBox control.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TEXT(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TEXT\_UPDATED command,
 which is generated by a wxTextCtrl control.}
@@ -48,16 +48,12 @@ which is generated by a wxScrollBar control. This is provided for compatibility
 more specific scrollbar event macros should be used instead (see \helpref{wxScrollEvent}{wxscrollevent}).}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMBOBOX(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_COMBOBOX\_SELECTED command,
 which is generated by a wxComboBox control.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_CLICKED event
+\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_CLICKED command,
-(a synonym for wxEVT\_COMMAND\_MENU\_SELECTED). Pass the id of the tool.}
+which is generated by a toobar button.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_RANGE(id1, id2, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_CLICKED event
+\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_RCLICKED(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_RCLICKED command,
-for a range id identifiers. Pass the ids of the tools.}
+which is generated by a toobar button.}
-\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_RCLICKED(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_RCLICKED event.
+\twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_ENTER(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_ENTER command,
-Pass the id of the tool.}
+which is generated by a toobar button.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_RCLICKED\_RANGE(id1, id2, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_RCLICKED event
 for a range of ids. Pass the ids of the tools.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_ENTER(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_ENTER event.
 Pass the id of the toolbar itself. The value of wxCommandEvent::GetSelection is the tool id, or -1 if the mouse cursor has moved off a tool.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_LEFT\_CLICK(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_LEFT\_CLICK command,
 which is generated by a control (Windows 95 and NT only).}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_LEFT\_DCLICK(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_LEFT\_DCLICK command,
@@ -181,8 +177,3 @@ Sets the {\bf m\_commandInt} member.
 Sets the {\bf m\_commandString} member.
 %%% Local Variables: 
 %%% mode: latex
 %%% TeX-master: "referenc"
 %%% End: 
--- a/docs/latex/wx/combobox.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/combobox.tex
@@ -26,20 +26,9 @@ displaying the current selection.}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMBOBOX(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_COMBOBOX\_SELECTED event,
 when an item on the list is selected.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TEXT(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TEXT\_UPDATED event,
 when the combobox text changes.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxListBox}{wxlistbox}, \helpref{wxTextCtrl}{wxtextctrl}, \helpref{wxChoice}{wxchoice},
+\helpref{wxListBox}{wxlistbox}, \helpref{wxTextCtrl}{wxtextctrl}, \helpref{wxChoice}{wxchoice}
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/config.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/config.tex
@@ -1,612 +0,0 @@
 \section{\class{wxConfigBase}}\label{wxconfigbase}
 wxConfigBase class defines the basic interface of all config classes. It can
 not be used by itself (it's an abstract base class) and you'll always use one
 of its derivations: wxIniConfig, wxFileConfig, wxRegConfig or
 any other.
 However, usually you don't even need to know the precise nature of the class
 you're working with but you would just use the wxConfigBase methods. This
 allows you to write the same code regardless of whether you're working with
 the registry under Win32 or text-based config files under Unix (or even
 Windows 3.1 .INI files if you're really unlucky). To make writing the portable
 code even easier, wxWindows provides a typedef wxConfig
 which is mapped onto the native wxConfigBase implementation on the given
 platform: i.e. wxRegConfig under Win32, wxIniConfig under Win16 and
 wxFileConfig otherwise.
 See \helpref{config overview}{configoverview} for the descriptions of all
 features of this class.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 No base class
 \wxheading{Example}
 Here is how you would typically use this class:
 \begin{verbatim}
  // using wxConfig instead of writing wxFileConfig or wxRegConfig enhances
  // portability of the code
  wxConfig *config = new wxConfig("MyAppName");
  wxString str;
  if ( config->Read("LastPrompt", &str) ) {
    // last prompt was found in the config file/registry and its value is now
    // in str
    ...
  }
  else {
    // no last prompt...
  }
  // another example: using default values and the full path instead of just
  // key name: if the key is not found , the value 17 is returned
  long value = config->Read("/LastRun/CalculatedValues/MaxValue", -1);
  ...
  ...
  ...
  // at the end of the program we would save everything back
  config->Write("LastPrompt", str);
  config->Write("/LastRun/CalculatedValues/MaxValue", value);
  // the changes will be written back automatically
  delete config;
 \end{verbatim}
 This basic example, of course, doesn't show all wxConfig features, such as
 enumerating, testing for existence and deleting the entries and groups of
 entries in the config file, its abilities to automatically store the default
 values or expand the environment variables on the fly. However, the main idea
 is that using this class is easy and that it should normally do what you
 expect it to.
 NB: in the documentation of this class, the words "config file" also mean
 "registry hive" for wxRegConfig and, generally speaking, might mean any
 physical storage where a wxConfigBase-derived class stores its data.
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Function groups}}}
 \membersection{Static functions}
 These functions deal with the "default" config object. Although its usage is
 not at all mandatory it may be convenient to use a global config object
 instead of creating and deleting the local config objects each time you need
 one (especially because creating a wxFileConfig object might be a time
 consuming operation). In this case, you may create this global config object
 in the very start of the program and {\it Set()} it as the default. Then, from
 anywhere in your program, you may access it using the {\it Get()} function. Of
 course, you should delete it on the program termination (otherwise, not only a
 memory leak will result, but even more importantly the changes won't be
 written back!).
 As it happens, you may even further simplify the procedure described above:
 you may forget about calling {\it Set()}. When {\it Get()} is called and there
 is no current object, it will create one using {\it Create()} function. To
 disable this behaviour {\it DontCreateOnDemand()} is provided.
 \helpref{Set}{wxconfigbaseset}\\
 \helpref{Get}{wxconfigbaseget}\\
 \helpref{Create}{wxconfigbasecreate}\\
 \helpref{DontCreateOnDemand}{wxconfigbasedontcreateondemand}
 \membersection{Constructor and destructor}
 \helpref{wxConfigBase}{wxconfigbasector}\\
 \helpref{\destruct{wxConfigBase}}{wxconfigbasedtor}
 \membersection{Path management}
 As explained in \helpref{config overview}{configoverview}, the config classes
 support a file system-like hierarchy of keys (files) and groups (directories).
 As in the file system case, to specify a key in the config class you must use
 a path to it. Config classes also support the notion of the current group,
 which makes it possible to use the relative paths. To clarify all this, here
 is an example (it's only for the sake of demonstration, it doesn't do anything
 sensible!):
 \begin{verbatim}
  wxConfig *config = new wxConfig("FooBarApp");
  // right now the current path is '/'
  conf->Write("RootEntry", 1);
  // go to some other place: if the group(s) don't exist, they will be created
  conf->SetPath("/Group/Subgroup");
  // create an entry in subgroup
  conf->Write("SubgroupEntry", 3);
  // '..' is understood
  conf->Write("../GroupEntry", 2);
  conf->SetPath("..");
  wxASSERT( conf->Read("Subgroup/SubgroupEntry", 0l) == 3 );
  // use absolute path: it's allowed, too
  wxASSERT( conf->Read("/RootEntry", 0l) == 1 );
 \end{verbatim}
 {\it Warning}: it's probably a good idea to always restore the path to its
 old value on function exit:
 \begin{verbatim}
  void foo(wxConfigBase *config)
  {
    wxString strOldPath = config->GetPath();
    config->SetPath("/Foo/Data");
    ...
    config->SetPath(strOldPath);
  }
 \end{verbatim}
 because otherwise the assert in the following example will surely fail
 (we suppose here that {\it foo()} function is the same as above except that it
 doesn't save and restore the path):
 \begin{verbatim}
  void bar(wxConfigBase *config)
  {
    config->Write("Test", 17);
    foo(config);
    // we're reading "/Foo/Data/Test" here! -1 will probably be returned...
    wxASSERT( config->Read("Test", -1) == 17 );
  }
 \end{verbatim}
 Finally, the path separator in wxConfigBase and derived classes is always '/',
 regardless of the platform (i.e. it's {\bf not} '$\backslash\backslash$' under Windows).
 \helpref{SetPath}{wxconfigbasesetpath}\\
 \helpref{GetPath}{wxconfigbasegetpath}
 \membersection{Enumeration}
 The functions in this section allow to enumerate all entries and groups in the
 config file. All functions here return FALSE when there are no more items.
 You must pass the same index to GetNext and GetFirst (don't modify it).
 Please note that it's {\bf not} the index of the current item (you will have
 some great surprizes with wxRegConfig if you assume this) and you shouldn't
 even look at it: it's just a "cookie" which stores the state of the
 enumeration. It can't be stored inside the class because it would prevent you
 from running several enumerations simultaneously, that's why you must pass it
 explicitly.
 Having said all this, enumerating the config entries/groups is very simple:
 \begin{verbatim}
  wxArrayString aNames;
  // enumeration variables
  wxString str;
  long dummy;
  // first enum all entries
  bool bCont = config->GetFirstEntry(str, dummy);
  while ( bCont ) {
    aNames.Add(str);
    bCont = GetConfig()->GetNextEntry(str, dummy);
  }
  ... we have all entry names in aNames...
  // now all groups...
  bCont = GetConfig()->GetFirstGroup(str, dummy);
  while ( bCont ) {
    aNames.Add(str);
    bCont = GetConfig()->GetNextGroup(str, dummy);
  }
  ... we have all group (and entry) names in aNames...
 \end{verbatim}
 There are also functions to get the number of entries/subgroups without
 actually enumerating them, but you will probably never need them.
 \helpref{GetFirstGroup}{wxconfigbasegetfirstgroup}\\
 \helpref{GetNextGroup}{wxconfigbasegetnextgroup}\\
 \helpref{GetFirstEntry}{wxconfigbasegetfirstentry}\\
 \helpref{GetNextEntry}{wxconfigbasegetnextentry}\\
 \helpref{GetNumberOfEntries}{wxconfigbasegetnumberofentries}\\
 \helpref{GetNumberOfGroups}{wxconfigbasegetnumberofgroups}
 \membersection{Tests of existence}
 \helpref{HasGroup}{wxconfigbasehasgroup}\\
 \helpref{HasEntry}{wxconfigbasehasentry}\\
 \helpref{Exists}{wxconfigbaseexists}
 \membersection{Miscellaneous accessors}
 \helpref{SetAppName}{wxconfigbasesetappname}\\
 \helpref{GetAppName}{wxconfigbasegetappname}\\
 \helpref{SetVendorName}{wxconfigbasesetvendorname}\\
 \helpref{GetVendorName}{wxconfigbasegetvendorname}
 \membersection{Key access}
 These function are the core of wxConfigBase class: they allow you to read and
 write config file data. All {\it Read} function take a default value which
 will be returned if the specified key is not found in the config file.
 Currently, only two types of data are supported: string and long (but it might
 change in the near future). To work with other types: for {\it int} or {\it
 bool} you can work with function taking/returning {\it long} and just use the
 casts. Better yet, just use {\it long} for all variables which you're going to
 save in the config file: chances are that \verb$sizeof(bool) == sizeof(int) == sizeof(long)$ anyhow on your system. For {\it float}, {\it double} and, in
 general, any other type you'd have to translate them to/from string
 representation and use string functions.
 Try not to read long values into string variables and vice versa: although it
 just might work with wxFileConfig, you will get a system error with
 wxRegConfig because in the Windows registry the different types of entries are
 indeed used.
 Final remark: the {\it szKey} parameter for all these functions can contain an
 arbitrary path (either relative or absolute), not just the key name.
 \helpref{Read}{wxconfigbaseread}\\
 \helpref{Write}{wxconfigbasewrite}\\
 \helpref{Flush}{wxconfigbaseflush}
 \membersection{Delete entries/groups}
 The functions in this section delete entries and/or groups of entries from the
 config file. {\it DeleteAll()} is especially useful if you want to erase all
 traces of your program presence: for example, when you uninstall it.
 \helpref{DeleteEntry}{wxconfigbasedeleteentry}\\
 \helpref{DeleteGroup}{wxconfigbasedeletegroup}\\
 \helpref{DeleteAll}{wxconfigbasedeleteall}
 \membersection{Options}
 Some aspects of wxConfigBase behaviour can be changed during run-time. The
 first of them is the expansion of environment variables in the string values
 read from the config file: for example, if you have the following in your
 config file:
 \begin{verbatim}
  # config file for my program
  UserData = $HOME/data
  # the following syntax is valud only under Windows
  UserData = %windir%\\data.dat
 \end{verbatim}
 the call to \verb$config->Read("UserData")$ will return something like
 \verb$"/home/zeitlin/data"$ if you're lucky enough to run a Linux system ;-)
 Although this feature is very useful, it may be annoying if you read a value
 which containts '\$' or '\%' symbols (\% is used for environment variables
 expansion under Windows) which are not used for environment variable
 expansion. In this situation you may call SetExpandEnvVars(FALSE) just before
 reading this value and SetExpandEnvVars(TRUE) just after. Another solution
 would be to prefix the offending symbols with a backslash.
 The following functions control this option:
 \helpref{IsExpandingEnvVars}{wxconfigbaseisexpandingenvvars}\\
 \helpref{SetExpandingEnvVars}{wxconfigbasesetexpandingenvvars}\\
 \helpref{SetRecordDefaults}{wxconfigbasesetrecorddefaults}\\
 \helpref{IsRecordingDefaults}{wxconfigbaseisrecordingdefaults}
 %%%%% MEMBERS HERE %%%%%
 \helponly{\insertatlevel{2}{
 \wxheading{Members}
 }}
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::wxConfigBase}\label{wxconfigbasector}
 \func{}{wxConfigBase}{\param{const wxString\& }{appName = wxEmptyString},
 \param{const wxString\& }{vendorName = wxEmptyString},
 \param{const wxString\& }{localFilename = wxEmptyString},
 \param{const wxString\& }{globalFilename = wxEmptyString},
 \param{long}{ style = 0}}
 This is the default and only constructor of the wxConfigBase class, and derived classes.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{appName}{The application name. If this is empty, the class will normally
 use \helpref{wxApp::GetAppName}{wxappgetappname} to set it. The application name
 is used in the registry key on Windows, and can be used to deduce the local filename
 parameter if that is missing.}
 \docparam{vendorName}{The vendor name. If this is empty, it is assumed that
 no vendor name is wanted, if this is optional for the current config class.
 The vendor name is appended to the application name for wxRegConfig.}
 \docparam{localFilename}{Some config classes require a local filename. If this is not
 present, but required, the application name will be used instead.}
 \docparam{globalFilename}{Some config classes require a global filename. If this is not
 present, but required, the application name will be used instead.}
 \docparam{style}{Can be one of wxCONFIG\_USE\_LOCAL\_FILE and wxCONFIG\_USE\_GLOBAL\_FILE.
 The style interpretation depends on the config class and is ignored by some.
 For wxFileConfig, these styles determine whether a local or global config file is created or used.
 If the flag is present but the parameter is empty, the parameter will be set to a default.
 If the parameter is present but the style flag not, the relevant flag will be added to the style.}
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 By default, environment variable expansion is on and recording
 defaults is off.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::\destruct{wxConfigBase}}\label{wxconfigbasedtor}
 \func{}{\destruct{wxConfigBase}}{\void}
 Empty but ensures that dtor of all derived classes is virtual.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::Create}\label{wxconfigbasecreate}
 \func{static wxConfigBase *}{Create}{\void}
 Create a new config object: this function will create the "best"
 implementation of wxConfig available for the current platform, see
 comments near the definition of wxCONFIG\_WIN32\_NATIVE for details. It returns
 the created object and also sets it as the current one.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::DontCreateOnDemand}\label{wxconfigbasedontcreateondemand}
 \func{void}{DontCreateOnDemand}{\void}
 Calling this function will prevent {\it Get()} from automatically creating a
 new config object if the current one is NULL. It might be useful to call it
 near the program end to prevent new config object "accidental" creation.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::DeleteAll}\label{wxconfigbasedeleteall}
 \func{bool}{DeleteAll}{\void}
 Delete the whole underlying object (disk file, registry key, ...). Primarly
 for use by desinstallation routine.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::DeleteEntry}\label{wxconfigbasedeleteentry}
 \func{bool}{DeleteEntry}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE}}
 Deletes the specified entry and the group it belongs to if
 it was the last key in it and the second parameter is true.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::DeleteGroup}\label{wxconfigbasedeletegroup}
 \func{bool}{DeleteGroup}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}}
 Delete the group (with all subgroups)
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::Exists}\label{wxconfigbaseexists}
 \constfunc{bool}{Exists}{\param{wxString\& }{strName}}
 returns TRUE if either a group or an entry with a given name exists
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::Flush}\label{wxconfigbaseflush}
 \func{bool}{Flush}{\param{bool }{bCurrentOnly = FALSE}}
 permanently writes all changes (otherwise, they're only written from object's
 destructor)
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::Get}\label{wxconfigbaseget}
 \func{wxConfigBase *}{Get}{\void}
 Get the current config object. If there is no current object, creates one
 (using {\it Create}) unless DontCreateOnDemand was called previously.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetAppName}\label{wxconfigbasegetappname}
 \constfunc{wxString}{GetAppName}{\void}
 Returns the application name.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetFirstGroup}\label{wxconfigbasegetfirstgroup}
 \constfunc{bool}{GetFirstGroup}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
 Gets the first group.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetFirstEntry}\label{wxconfigbasegetfirstentry}
 \constfunc{bool}{GetFirstEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
 Gets the first entry.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNextGroup}\label{wxconfigbasegetnextgroup}
 \constfunc{bool}{GetNextGroup}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
 Gets the next group.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNextEntry}\label{wxconfigbasegetnextentry}
 \constfunc{bool}{GetNextEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{str}, \param{long\&}{ index}}
 Gets the next entry.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNumberOfEntries}\label{wxconfigbasegetnumberofentries}
 \constfunc{uint }{GetNumberOfEntries}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = FALSE}}
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetNumberOfGroups}\label{wxconfigbasegetnumberofgroups}
 \constfunc{uint}{GetNumberOfGroups}{\param{bool }{bRecursive = FALSE}}
 Get number of entries/subgroups in the current group, with or without
 its subgroups.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetPath}\label{wxconfigbasegetpath}
 \constfunc{const wxString\&}{GetPath}{\void}
 Retrieve the current path (always as absolute path).
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::GetVendorName}\label{wxconfigbasegetvendorname}
 \constfunc{wxString}{GetVendorName}{\void}
 Returns the vendor name.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::HasEntry}\label{wxconfigbasehasentry}
 \constfunc{bool}{HasEntry}{\param{wxString\& }{strName}}
 returns TRUE if the entry by this name exists
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::HasGroup}\label{wxconfigbasehasgroup}
 \constfunc{bool}{HasGroup}{\param{const wxString\& }{strName}}
 returns TRUE if the group by this name exists
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::IsExpandingEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbaseisexpandingenvvars}
 \constfunc{bool}{IsExpandingEnvVars}{\void}
 Returns TRUE if we are expanding environment variables in key values.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::IsRecordingDefaults}\label{wxconfigbaseisrecordingdefaults}
 \func{bool}{IsRecordingDefaults}{\void} const
 Returns TRUE if we are writing defaults back to the config file.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::Read}\label{wxconfigbaseread}
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}}
 Read a string from the key, returning TRUE if the value was read. If the key was not
 found, {\it str} is not changed.
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{wxString*}{ str}, \param{const wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
 Read a string from the key. The default value is returned if the key was not found.
 Returns TRUE if value was really read, FALSE if the default was used.
 \constfunc{wxString}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{const wxString\& }{defaultVal}}
 Another version of {\it Read()}, returning the string value directly.
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{long*}{ l}}
 Reads a long value, returning TRUE if the value was
 found. If the value was not found, {\it l} is not changed.
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{long*}{ l}, \param{long}{ defaultVal}}
 Reads a long value, returning TRUE if the value was
 found. If the value was not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
 \constfunc{long }{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{key}, \param{long}{ defaultVal}}
 Reads a long value from the key and returns it. {\it defaultVal} is returned if the key is not
 found.
 NB: writing
 {\small
 \begin{verbatim}
  conf->Read("key", 0);
 \end{verbatim}
 }
 won't work because the call is ambiguous: compiler can not choose between two {\it Read} functions. Instead, write:
 {\small
 \begin{verbatim}
  conf->Read("key", 0l);
 \end{verbatim}
 }
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{double*}{ d}}
 Reads a double value, returning TRUE if the value was
 found. If the value was not found, {\it d} is not changed.
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{double*}{ d}, \param{double}{ defaultVal}}
 Reads a double value, returning TRUE if the value was
 found. If the value was not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool*}{ b}}
 Reads a bool value, returning TRUE if the value was
 found. If the value was not found, {\it b} is not changed.
 \constfunc{bool}{Read}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool*}{ d}, \param{bool}{ defaultVal}}
 Reads a bool value, returning TRUE if the value was
 found. If the value was not found, {\it defaultVal} is used instead.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::Set}\label{wxconfigbaseset}
 \func{wxConfigBase *}{Set}{\param{wxConfigBase *}{pConfig}}
 Sets the config object as the current one, returns the pointer to the previous
 current object (both the parameter and returned value may be NULL)
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::SetAppName}\label{wxconfigbasesetappname}
 \func{void }{SetAppName}{\param{const wxString\&}{ appName}}
 Sets the application name.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::SetExpandingEnvVars}\label{wxconfigbasesetexpandingenvvars}
 \func{void}{SetExpandEnvVars }{\param{bool }{bDoIt = TRUE}}
 Determine whether we wish to expand environment variables in key values.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::SetPath}\label{wxconfigbasesetpath}
 \func{void}{SetPath}{\param{const wxString\& }{strPath}}
 Set current path: if the first character is '/', it's the absolute path,
 otherwise it's a relative path. '..' is supported. If the strPath
 doesn't exist it is created.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::SetRecordDefaults}\label{wxconfigbasesetrecorddefaults}
 \func{void}{SetRecordDefaults}{\param{bool }{bDoIt = TRUE}}
 Sets whether defaults are written back to the config file.
 If on (default is off) all default values are written back to the config file. This allows
 the user to see what config options may be changed and is probably useful only
 for wxFileConfig.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::SetVendorName}\label{wxconfigbasesetvendorname}
 \func{void}{SetVendorName}{\param{const wxString\&}{ vendorName}}
 Sets the vendor name.
 \membersection{wxConfigBase::Write}\label{wxconfigbasewrite}
 \func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{const wxString\& }{ value}}
 \func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{long}{ value}}
 \func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{double}{ value}}
 \func{bool}{Write}{\param{const wxString\& }{ key}, \param{bool}{ value}}
 These functions write the specified value to the config file and
 return TRUE on success.
--- a/docs/latex/wx/database.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/database.tex
@@ -91,7 +91,7 @@ Returns the name of the database associated with the current connection.
 \func{wxString}{GetDataSource}{\void}
 Returns the name of the connected data source.
-
+  
 \membersection{wxDatabase::GetErrorClass}
 \func{wxString}{GetErrorClass}{\void}
@@ -141,7 +141,7 @@ Returns the current ODBC database handle.
 \func{HENV}{GetHENV}{\void}
 Returns the ODBC environment handle. 
-
+  
 \membersection{wxDatabase::GetInfo}
 \func{bool}{GetInfo}{\param{long}{ infoType}, \param{long *}{buf}}
@@ -219,7 +219,7 @@ source. The parameters exclusive and readOnly are not used.
 \func{void}{OnSetOptions}{\param{wxRecordSet *}{recordSet}}
 Not implemented.  
-
+  
 \membersection{wxDatabase::OnWaitForDataSource}
 \func{void}{OnWaitForDataSource}{\param{bool}{ stillExecuting}}
@@ -237,13 +237,13 @@ Sends a rollback to the ODBC driver. Not implemented.
 \func{void}{SetDataSource}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}}
 Sets the name of the data source. Not implemented.
-
+  
 \membersection{wxDatabase::SetLoginTimeout}
 \func{void}{SetLoginTimeout}{\param{long}{ seconds}}
 Sets the time to wait for an user login. Not implemented.
-
+  
 \membersection{wxDatabase::SetPassword}
 \func{void}{SetPassword}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}}
@@ -262,7 +262,7 @@ mode is supported, so this function has no effect.
 \func{void}{SetQueryTimeout}{\param{long}{ seconds}}
 Sets the time to wait for a response to a query. Not implemented.
-
+ 
 \membersection{wxDatabase::SetUsername}
 \func{void}{SetUsername}{\param{const wxString\& }{s}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/datstrm.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/datstrm.tex
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@ Sparc or anything else.
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-\membersection{wxDataStream::wxDataStream}\label{wxdatastreamconstr}
+\membersection{wxDataStream::wxDataStream}\label{wxwaveconstr}
 \func{}{wxDataStream}{\param{istream\&}{ stream}}
@@ -96,19 +96,14 @@ Writes the double {\it f} to the stream using the IEEE format.
 \membersection{wxDataStream::WriteString}
-\func{void}{wxDataStream::WriteString}{{\param const wxString\& }{string}}
+\func{void}{wxDataStream::WriteString}{{\param const wxString& }{string}}
 Writes {\it string} to the stream. Actually, this method writes the size of
 the string before writing {\it string} itself.
 \membersection{wxDataStream::WriteLine}
-\func{void}{wxDataStream::WriteLine}{{\param const wxString\& }{string}}
+\func{void}{wxDataStream::WriteLine}{{\param const wxString& }{string}}
 Writes {\it string} as a line. Depending on the operating system, it adds
 \\n or \\r\\n.
 %%% Local Variables: 
 %%% mode: latex
 %%% TeX-master: "referenc"
 %%% End: 
--- a/docs/latex/wx/dc.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/dc.tex
@@ -157,12 +157,10 @@ mapping mode. Use this function for converting a height, for example.
 \func{void}{DrawArc}{\param{long}{ x1}, \param{long}{ y1}, \param{long}{ x2}, \param{long}{ y2}, \param{double}{ xc}, \param{double}{ yc}}
-Draws an arc of a circle, centred on ({\it xc, yc}), with starting point ({\it x1, y1})
+Draws an arc, centred on ({\it xc, yc}), with starting point ({\it x1, y1})
 and ending at ({\it x2, y2}).   The current pen is used for the outline
 and the current brush for filling the shape.
 The arc is drawn in an anticlockwise direction from the start point to the end point.
 \membersection{wxDC::DrawEllipse}\label{wxdcdrawellipse}
 \func{void}{DrawEllipse}{\param{long}{ x}, \param{long}{ y}, \param{long}{ width}, \param{long}{ height}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/dialog.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/dialog.tex
@@ -30,9 +30,8 @@ dialog to respond to system close events.
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxCAPTION}}{Puts a caption on the dialog box (Motif only).}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxDEFAULT\_DIALOG\_STYLE}}{Equivalent to a combination of wxCAPTION, wxSYSTEM\_MENU and wxTHICK\_FRAME}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxRESIZE\_BORDER}}{Display a resizeable frame around the window (Motif only).}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSYSTEM\_MENU}}{Display a system menu.}
+\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSYSTEM\_MENU}}{Display a system menu (Motif only).}
-\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTHICK\_FRAME}}{Display a thick frame around the window.}
+\twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTHICK\_FRAME}}{Display a thick frame around the window (Motif only).}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSTAY\_ON\_TOP}}{The dialog stays on top of all other windows (Windows only).}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxNO\_3D}}{Under Windows, specifies that the child controls
 should not have 3D borders unless specified in the control.}
 \end{twocollist}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/docchfrm.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/docchfrm.tex
@@ -35,7 +35,7 @@ The view associated with the frame.
 \membersection{wxDocChildFrame::wxDocChildFrame}
 \func{}{wxDocChildFrame}{\param{wxDocument* }{doc}, \param{wxView* }{view}, \param{wxFrame* }{parent},
- \param{wxWindowID}{ id}, \param{const wxString\& }{title}, \param{const wxPoint\&}{ pos = wxDefaultPosition},
+ \param{const wxString\& }{title}, \param{const wxPoint\&}{ pos = wxDefaultPosition},
 \param{const wxSize\&}{ size = wxDefaultSize},
 \param{long}{ style = wxDEFAULT\_FRAME\_STYLE}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = ``frame"}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/docmdich.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/docmdich.tex
@@ -1,89 +0,0 @@
 \section{\class{wxDocMDIChildFrame}}\label{wxdocmdichildframe}
 The wxDocMDIChildFrame class provides a default frame for displaying documents
 on separate windows. This class can only be used for MDI child frames.
 The class is part of the document/view framework supported by wxWindows,
 and cooperates with the \helpref{wxView}{wxview}, \helpref{wxDocument}{wxdocument},
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxDocManager}{wxdocmanager} and \helpref{wxDocTemplate}{wxdoctemplate} classes.
 See the example application in {\tt samples/docview}.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 \helpref{wxMDIChildFrame}{wxmdichildframe}\\
 \helpref{wxFrame}{wxframe}\\
 \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
 \helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
 \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{Document/view overview}{docviewoverview}, \helpref{wxMDIChildFrame}{wxmdichildframe}
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::m\_childDocument}
 \member{wxDocument*}{m\_childDocument}
 The document associated with the frame.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::m\_childView}
 \member{wxView*}{m\_childView}
 The view associated with the frame.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::wxDocMDIChildFrame}
 \func{}{wxDocMDIChildFrame}{\param{wxDocument* }{doc}, \param{wxView* }{view}, \param{wxFrame* }{parent},
 \param{wxWindowID}{ id}, \param{const wxString\& }{title}, \param{const wxPoint\&}{ pos = wxDefaultPosition},
 \param{const wxSize\&}{ size = wxDefaultSize},
 \param{long}{ style = wxDEFAULT\_FRAME\_STYLE}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = ``frame"}}
 Constructor.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::\destruct{wxDocMDIChildFrame}}
 \func{}{\destruct{wxDocMDIChildFrame}}{\void}
 Destructor.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::GetDocument}
 \constfunc{wxDocument*}{GetDocument}{\void}
 Returns the document associated with this frame.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::GetView}
 \constfunc{wxView*}{GetView}{\void}
 Returns the view associated with this frame.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::OnActivate}
 \func{void}{OnActivate}{\param{bool}{ active}}
 Sets the currently active view to be the frame's view. You may need
 to override (but still call) this function in order to set the keyboard
 focus for your subwindow.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::OnClose}
 \func{virtual bool}{OnClose}{\void}
 Closes and deletes the current view and document.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::SetDocument}
 \func{void}{SetDocument}{\param{wxDocument *}{doc}}
 Sets the document for this frame.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIChildFrame::SetView}
 \func{void}{SetView}{\param{wxView *}{view}}
 Sets the view for this frame.
--- a/docs/latex/wx/docmdipr.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/docmdipr.tex
@@ -1,79 +0,0 @@
 \section{\class{wxDocMDIParentFrame}}\label{wxdocmdiparentframe}
 The wxDocMDIParentFrame class provides a default top-level frame for
 applications using the document/view framework. This class can only be used for MDI parent frames.
 It cooperates with the \helpref{wxView}{wxview}, \helpref{wxDocument}{wxdocument},
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxDocManager}{wxdocmanager} and \helpref{wxDocTemplates}{wxdoctemplate} classes.
 See the example application in {\tt samples/docview}.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 \helpref{wxMDIParentFrame}{wxmdiparentframe}\\
 \helpref{wxFrame}{wxframe}\\
 \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
 \helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
 \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{Document/view overview}{docviewoverview}, \helpref{wxMDIParentFrame}{wxmdiparentframe}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
 \membersection{wxDocMDIParentFrame::wxDocMDIParentFrame}
 \func{}{wxDocMDIParentFrame}{\param{wxFrame *}{parent}, \param{wxWindowID}{ id},
 \param{const wxString\& }{title}, \param{int}{ x}, \param{int}{ y}, \param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height},
 \param{long}{ style}, \param{const wxString\& }{name}}
 Constructor.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIParentFrame::\destruct{wxDocMDIParentFrame}}
 \func{}{\destruct{wxDocMDIParentFrame}}{\void}
 Destructor.
 \membersection{wxDocMDIParentFrame::OnClose}
 \func{bool}{OnClose}{\void}
 Deletes all views and documents. If no user input cancelled the
 operation, the function returns TRUE and the application will exit.
 Since understanding how document/view clean-up takes place can be difficult,
 the implementation of this function is shown below.
 \begin{verbatim}
 bool wxDocMDIParentFrame::OnClose(void)
 {
  // Delete all views and documents
  wxNode *node = docManager->GetDocuments().First();
  while (node)
  {
    wxDocument *doc = (wxDocument *)node->Data();
    wxNode *next = node->Next();
    if (!doc->Close())
      return FALSE;
    // Implicitly deletes the document when the last
    // view is removed (deleted)
    doc->DeleteAllViews();
    // Check document is deleted
    if (docManager->GetDocuments().Member(doc))
      delete doc;
    // This assumes that documents are not connected in
    // any way, i.e. deleting one document does NOT
    // delete another.
    node = next;
  }
  return TRUE;
 }
 \end{verbatim}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/docprfrm.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/docprfrm.tex
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ See the example application in {\tt samples/docview}.
 \membersection{wxDocParentFrame::wxDocParentFrame}
-\func{}{wxDocParentFrame}{\param{wxFrame *}{parent}, \param{wxWindowID}{ id},
+\func{}{wxDocParentFrame}{\param{wxFrame *}{parent},
 \param{const wxString\& }{title}, \param{int}{ x}, \param{int}{ y}, \param{int}{ width}, \param{int}{ height},
 \param{long}{ style}, \param{const wxString\& }{name}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/frame.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/frame.tex
@@ -4,10 +4,6 @@ A frame is a window whose size and position can (usually) be changed by the user
 thick borders and a title bar, and can optionally contain a menu bar, toolbar and
 status bar. A frame can contain any window that is not a frame or dialog.
 A frame that has a status bar and toolbar created via the CreateStatusBar/CreateToolBar functions
 manages these windows, and adjusts the value returned by GetClientSize to reflect
 the remaining size available to application windows.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
@@ -126,9 +122,7 @@ for further details.
 \membersection{wxFrame::CreateStatusBar}\label{wxframecreatestatusbar}
-\func{virtual wxStatusBar*}{CreateStatusBar}{\param{int}{ number = 1},
+\func{virtual bool}{CreateStatusBar}{\param{int}{ number = 1}}
 \param{long}{ style = 0},
 \param{wxWindowID}{ id = -1}, \param{const wxString\&}{ name = "statusBar"}}
 Creates a status bar at the bottom of the frame.
@@ -137,17 +131,9 @@ Creates a status bar at the bottom of the frame.
 \docparam{number}{The number of fields to create. Specify a
 value greater than 1 to create a multi-field status bar.}
 \docparam{style}{The status bar style. See \helpref{wxStatusBar}{wxstatusbar} for a list
 of valid styles.}
 \docparam{id}{The status bar window identifier. If -1, an identifier will be chosen by
 wxWindows.}
 \docparam{name}{The status bar window name.}
 \wxheading{Return value}
-A pointer to the the status bar if it was created successfully, NULL otherwise.
+TRUE if the status bar was created successfully.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
@@ -165,45 +151,6 @@ Note that you can put controls and other windows on the status bar if you wish.
 \helpref{wxFrame::OnCreateStatusBar}{wxframeoncreatestatusbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxFrame::GetStatusBar}{wxframegetstatusbar}
 \membersection{wxFrame::CreateToolBar}\label{wxframecreatetoolbar}
 \func{virtual wxToolBar*}{CreateToolBar}{\param{long}{ style = wxNO\_BORDER \pipe wxTB\_HORIZONTAL},
 \param{wxWindowID}{ id = -1}, \param{const wxString\&}{ name = "toolBar"}}
 Creates a toolbar at the top or left of the frame.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{style}{The toolbar style. See \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar} for a list
 of valid styles.}
 \docparam{id}{The toolbar window identifier. If -1, an identifier will be chosen by
 wxWindows.}
 \docparam{name}{The toolbar window name.}
 \wxheading{Return value}
 A pointer to the the toolbar if it was created successfully, NULL otherwise.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 By default, the toolbar is an instance of wxToolBar (which is defined to be
 a suitable toolbar class on each platform, such as wxToolBar95). To use a different class,
 override \helpref{wxFrame::OnCreateToolBar}{wxframeoncreatetoolbar}.
 When a toolbar has been created with this function, or made known to the frame
 with \helpref{wxFrame::SetToolBar}{wxframesettoolbar}, the frame will manage the toolbar
 position and adjust the return value from \helpref{wxWindow::GetClientSize}{wxwindowgetclientsize} to
 reflect the available space for application windows.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxFrame::CreateStatusBar}{wxframecreatestatusbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxFrame::OnCreateToolBar}{wxframeoncreatetoolbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxFrame::SetToolBar}{wxframesettoolbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxFrame::GetToolBar}{wxframegettoolbar}
 \membersection{wxFrame::GetMenuBar}\label{wxframegetmenubar}
 \constfunc{wxMenuBar*}{GetMenuBar}{\void}
@@ -231,17 +178,6 @@ Returns a pointer to the status bar currently associated with the frame (if any)
 Gets a temporary pointer to the frame title. See
 \helpref{wxFrame::SetTitle}{wxframesettitle}.
 \membersection{wxFrame::GetToolBar}\label{wxframegettoolbar}
 \func{wxToolBar*}{GetToolBar}{\void}
 Returns a pointer to the toolbar currently associated with the frame (if any).
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxFrame::CreateToolBar}{wxframecreatetoolbar}, \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxFrame::SetToolBar}{wxframesettoolbar}
 \membersection{wxFrame::Iconize}\label{wxframeiconize}
 \func{void}{Iconize}{\param{const bool}{ iconize}}
@@ -333,9 +269,7 @@ If you call wxFrame::LoadAccelerators, you need to override this function e.g.
 \membersection{wxFrame::OnCreateStatusBar}\label{wxframeoncreatestatusbar}
-\func{virtual wxStatusBar*}{OnCreateStatusBar}{\param{int }{number}
+\func{virtual wxStatusBar*}{OnCreateStatusBar}{\param{int }{number}}
 \param{long}{ style},
 \param{wxWindowID}{ id}, \param{const wxString\&}{ name}}
 Virtual function called when a status bar is requested by \helpref{wxFrame::CreateStatusBar}{wxframecreatestatusbar}.
@@ -343,14 +277,6 @@ Virtual function called when a status bar is requested by \helpref{wxFrame::Crea
 \docparam{number}{The number of fields to create.}
 \docparam{style}{The window style. See \helpref{wxStatusBar}{wxstatusbar} for a list
 of valid styles.}
 \docparam{id}{The window identifier. If -1, an identifier will be chosen by
 wxWindows.}
 \docparam{name}{The window name.}
 \wxheading{Return value}
 A status bar object.
@@ -364,36 +290,6 @@ implementation returns an instance of \helpref{wxStatusBar}{wxstatusbar}.
 \helpref{wxFrame::CreateStatusBar}{wxframecreatestatusbar}, \helpref{wxStatusBar}{wxstatusbar}.
 \membersection{wxFrame::OnCreateToolBar}\label{wxframeoncreatetoolbar}
 \func{virtual wxToolBar*}{OnCreateToolBar}{\param{long}{ style},
 \param{wxWindowID}{ id}, \param{const wxString\&}{ name}}
 Virtual function called when a toolbar is requested by \helpref{wxFrame::CreateToolBar}{wxframecreatetoolbar}.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{style}{The toolbar style. See \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar} for a list
 of valid styles.}
 \docparam{id}{The toolbar window identifier. If -1, an identifier will be chosen by
 wxWindows.}
 \docparam{name}{The toolbar window name.}
 \wxheading{Return value}
 A toolbar object.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 An application can override this function to return a different kind of toolbar. The default
 implementation returns an instance of \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar}.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxFrame::CreateToolBar}{wxframecreatetoolbar}, \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar}.
 \membersection{wxFrame::OnMenuCommand}\label{wxframeonmenucommand}
 \func{void}{OnMenuCommand}{\param{wxCommandEvent\&}{ event}}
@@ -492,17 +388,6 @@ Note that it is not possible to call this function twice for the same frame obje
 \helpref{wxFrame::GetMenuBar}{wxframegetmenubar}, \helpref{wxMenuBar}{wxmenubar}, \helpref{wxMenu}{wxmenu}.
 \membersection{wxFrame::SetStatusBar}\label{wxframesetstatusbar}
 \func{void}{SetStatusBar}{\param{wxStatusBar*}{ statusBar}}
 Associates a status bar with the frame.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxFrame::CreateStatusBar}{wxframecreatestatusbar}, \helpref{wxStatusBar}{wxstatusbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxFrame::GetStatusBar}{wxframegetstatusbar}
 \membersection{wxFrame::SetStatusText}\label{wxframesetstatustext}
 \func{virtual void}{SetStatusText}{\param{const wxString\& }{ text}, \param{int}{ number = 0}}
@@ -544,17 +429,6 @@ The widths of the variable fields are calculated from the total width of all fie
 minus the sum of widths of the non-variable fields, divided by the number of 
 variable fields.
 \membersection{wxFrame::SetToolBar}\label{wxframesettoolbar}
 \func{void}{SetToolBar}{\param{wxToolBar*}{ toolBar}}
 Associates a toolbar with the frame.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxFrame::CreateToolBar}{wxframecreatetoolbar}, \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxFrame::GetToolBar}{wxframegettoolbar}
 \membersection{wxFrame::SetTitle}\label{wxframesettitle}
 \func{virtual void}{SetTitle}{\param{const wxString\& }{ title}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/function.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/function.tex
@@ -479,6 +479,113 @@ This function is only available under Windows.
 Globally sets the cursor; only has an effect in MS Windows.
 See also \helpref{wxCursor}{wxcursor}, \helpref{wxWindow::SetCursor}{wxwindowsetcursor}.
 \section{System event functions}
 The wxWindows system event implementation is incomplete and
 experimental, but is intended to be a platform-independent way of
 intercepting and sending events, including defining
 application-specific events and handlers.
 Ultimately it is intended to be used as a way of testing wxWindows
 applications using scripts, although there are currently
 problems with this (especially with modal dialogs).
 All this is documented more to provoke comments and suggestions, and
 jog my own memory, rather than to be used, since it has not been
 tested. However {\bf wxSendEvent} will probably work if you
 instantiate the event structure properly for a command event type (see
 the code in {\tt wb\_panel.cpp} for \helpref{wxWindow::OnDefaultAction}{wxwindowondefaultaction}\rtfsp
 which uses {\bf wxSendEvent} to send a command to the default button).
 \membersection{::wxAddPrimaryEventHandler}
 \func{bool}{wxAddPrimaryEventHandler}{\param{wxEventHandler}{ handlerFunc}}
 Add a primary event handler---the normal event handler for this
 event. For built-in events, these would include moving and resizing
 windows. User-defined primary events might include the code to
 select an image in a diagram (which could of course be achieved by a series
 of external events for mouse-clicking, but would be more difficult to specify
 and less robust).
 Returns TRUE if it succeeds.
 An event handler takes a pointer to a wxEvent and a boolean flag which is
 TRUE if the event was externally generated, and returns a boolean which is
 TRUE if that event was handled.
 \membersection{::wxAddSecondaryEventHandler}
 \func{bool}{wxAddSecondaryEventHandler}{\param{wxEventHandler}{ handlerFunc}, \param{bool}{ pre},\\
  \param{bool}{ override}, \param{bool }{append}}
 Add a secondary event handler, pre = TRUE iff it should be called before the
 event is executed. override = TRUE iff the handler is allowed to override
 all subsequent events by returning TRUE. Returns TRUE if succeeds.
 A secondary event handler is an application-defined handler that may
 intercept normal events, possibly overriding them. A primary event handler
 provides the normal behaviour for the event.
 An event handler takes a pointer to a wxEvent and a boolean flag which is
 TRUE if the event was externally generated, and returns a boolean which is
 TRUE if that event was handled.
 \membersection{::wxNotifyEvent}
 \func{bool}{wxNotifyEvent}{\param{wxEvent\&}{ event}, \param{bool}{ pre}}
 Notify the system of the event you are about to execute/have just
 executed.  If TRUE is returned and pre = TRUE, the calling code should
 not execute the event (since it has been intercepted by a handler and
 vetoed).
 These events are always internal, because they're generated from within
 the main application code.
 \membersection{::wxRegisterEventClass}
 \func{void}{wxRegisterEventClass}{\param{WXTYPE}{ eventClassId},\param{WXTYPE}{ superClassId},\\
  \param{wxEventConstructor}{ constructor}, \param{const wxString\& }{description}}
 Register a new event class (derived from wxEvent), giving the new
 event class type, its superclass, a function for creating a new event
 object of this class, and an optional description.
 \membersection{::wxRegisterEventName}
 \func{void}{wxRegisterEventName}{\param{WXTYPE}{ eventTypeId},\param{WXTYPE}{ eventClassId},\\
  \param{const wxString\& }{eventName}}
 Register the name of the event. This will allow a simple command
 language where giving the event type name and some arguments will
 cause a new event of class {\it eventClassId} to be created, with given
 event type, and some arguments, allows an event to be dynamically
 constructed and sent.
 \membersection{::wxRegisterExternalEventHandlers}
 \func{void}{wxRegisterExternalEventHandlers}{\void}
 Define this and link before wxWindows library to allow registering
 events from `outside' the main application.
 \membersection{::wxRemoveSecondaryEventHandler}
 \func{bool}{wxRemoveSecondaryEventHandler}{\param{wxEventHandler}{ handlerFunc}, \param{bool}{ pre}}
 Remove a secondary event handler. Returns TRUE if it succeeds.
 \membersection{::wxSendEvent}\label{wxsendevent}
 \func{bool}{wxSendEvent}{\param{wxEvent\&}{ event}, \param{bool}{ external}}
 Send an event to the system; usually it will be external, but set
 external to FALSE if calling from within the main application in
 response to other events.
 Returns TRUE if the event was processed.
 \section{Printer settings}\label{printersettings}
 The following functions are used to control PostScript printing. Under
--- a/docs/latex/wx/gauge.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/gauge.tex
@@ -21,10 +21,6 @@ There are no user commands for the gauge.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 wxGauge is read-only so generates no events.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxSlider}{wxslider}, \helpref{wxScrollBar}{wxscrollbar}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/joystick.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/joystick.tex
@@ -147,11 +147,11 @@ Gets the position of the fifth axis of the joystick, if it exists.
 Returns the maximum V position.
-\membersection{wxJoystick::GetVMin}\label{wxjoystickgetvmin}
+\membersection{wxJoystick::GetUMin}\label{wxjoystickgetumin}
-\constfunc{int}{GetVMin}{\void}
+\constfunc{int}{GetUMin}{\void}
-Returns the minimum V position.
+Returns the minimum U position.
 \membersection{wxJoystick::GetVPosition}\label{wxjoystickgetvposition}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/listbox.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/listbox.tex
@@ -36,20 +36,9 @@ select multiple items using the SHIFT key and the mouse or special key combinati
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LISTBOX(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_LISTBOX\_SELECTED event,
 when an item on the list is selected.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LISTBOX\_DCLICK(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_LISTBOX\_DOUBLECLICKED event,
 when the listbox is doubleclicked.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxChoice}{wxchoice}, \helpref{wxComboBox}{wxcombobox}, \helpref{wxListCtrl}{wxlistctrl},
+\helpref{wxChoice}{wxchoice}, \helpref{wxComboBox}{wxcombobox}, \helpref{wxListCtrl}{wxlistctrl}
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/listctrl.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/listctrl.tex
@@ -35,28 +35,6 @@ the list wraps, unlike a wxListBox.}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 To process input from a list control, use these event handler macros to direct input to member
 functions that take a \helpref{wxListEvent}{wxlistevent} argument.
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_BEGIN\_DRAG(id, func)}}{Begin dragging with the left mouse button.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_BEGIN\_RDRAG(id, func)}}{Begin dragging with the right mouse button.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_BEGIN\_LABEL\_EDIT(id, func)}}{Begin editing a label.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_END\_LABEL\_EDIT(id, func)}}{Finish editing a label.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_DELETE\_ITEM(id, func)}}{Delete an item.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_DELETE\_ALL\_ITEMS(id, func)}}{Delete all items.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_GET\_INFO(id, func)}}{Request information from the application, usually the item text.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_SET\_INFO(id, func)}}{Information is being supplied (not implemented).}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_ITEM\_SELECTED(id, func)}}{The item has been selected.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_ITEM\_DESELECTED(id, func)}}{The item has been deselected.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_KEY\_DOWN(id, func)}}{A key has been pressed.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_INSERT\_ITEM(id, func)}}{An item has been inserted.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LIST\_COL\_CLICK(id, func)}}{A column ({\bf m\_col}) has been left-clicked.}
 \end{twocollist}%
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxListCtrl overview}{wxlistctrloverview}, \helpref{wxListBox}{wxlistbox}, \helpref{wxTreeCtrl}{wxtreectrl},\rtfsp
--- a/docs/latex/wx/manual.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/manual.tex
@@ -1,14 +1,4 @@
-\documentstyle[a4,11pt,makeidx,verbatim,texhelp,fancyheadings,palatino]{report}
+\documentstyle[a4,makeidx,verbatim,texhelp,fancyhea,mysober,mytitle]{report}
 % JACS: doesn't make it through Tex2RTF, sorry.I'll put it into texhelp.sty
 % since Tex2RTF doesn't parse it.
 % BTW, style MUST be report for it to work for Tex2RTF.
 %KB:
 %\addtolength{\textwidth}{1in}
 %\addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5in}
 %\addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.5in}
 %\addtolength{\textheight}{1in}
 %\sloppy
 %end of my changes
 \newcommand{\indexit}[1]{#1\index{#1}}%
 \newcommand{\pipe}[0]{$\|$\ }%
 \definecolour{black}{0}{0}{0}%
@@ -26,11 +16,11 @@
 \parskip=10pt
 \parindent=0pt
 \title{User Manual for wxWindows 2.0: a portable C++ GUI toolkit}
-\winhelponly{\author{by Julian Smart
+\winhelponly{\author{by Julian Smart and Markus Holzem
 %\winhelponly{\\$$\image{1cm;0cm}{wxwin.wmf}$$}
 }}
 \winhelpignore{\author{Julian Smart}
-\date{July 31st 1998}
+\date{June 4th 1998}
 }
 \makeindex
 \begin{document}
@@ -85,8 +75,7 @@
 \setfooter{\thepage}{}{}{}{}{\thepage}%
 \begin{center}
-Copyright (c) 1998 Julian Smart, Markus Holzem, Robert Roebling and other
+Copyright (c) 1997 Julian Smart and Markus Holzem\\
 members of the wxWindows team\\
 Portions (c) 1996 Artificial Intelligence Applications Institute\\
 \end{center}
@@ -100,7 +89,7 @@ IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
 MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
 IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE APPLICATIONS INSTITUTE OR THE
-UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH OR ANY MEMBERS OF THE WXWINDOWS TEAM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
+UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH OR JULIAN SMART OR MARKUS HOLZEM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
 LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
@@ -111,7 +100,6 @@ THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
 \helpinput{category.tex}
 \helpinput{topics.tex}
 \begin{comment}
 \newpage
 % Puts books in the bibliography without needing to cite them in the
@@ -127,7 +115,6 @@ THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.
 \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Bibliography}
 \setheader{{\it REFERENCES}}{}{}{}{}{{\it REFERENCES}}%
 \setfooter{\thepage}{}{}{}{}{\thepage}%
 \end{comment}
 \newpage
 \addcontentsline{toc}{chapter}{Index}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/menu.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/menu.tex
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ With a popup menu, there is a variety of ways to handle a menu selection event
 \begin{enumerate}\itemsep=0pt
 \item Define a callback of type wxFunction, which you pass to the wxMenu constructor.
-The callback takes a reference to the menu, and a reference to a \helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent}.
+The callback takes a reference to a window, and a reference to a \helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent}.
 \item Derive a new class from wxMenu and define event table entries using the EVT\_MENU macro.
 \item Set a new event handler for wxMenu, using an object whose class has EVT\_MENU entries.
 \item Provide EVT\_MENU handlers in the window which pops up the menu, or in an ancestor of
--- a/docs/latex/wx/menuitem.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/menuitem.tex
@@ -141,27 +141,27 @@ Returns TRUE if the item is a separator.
 \membersection{wxMenuItem::SetBackgroundColour}\label{wxmenuitemsetbackgroundcolour}
-\constfunc{void}{SetBackgroundColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colour}}
+\constfunc{void}{SetBackgroundColour}{\param{const wxColour& }{colour}}
 Sets the background colour associated with the menu item (Windows only).
 \membersection{wxMenuItem::SetBitmaps}\label{wxmenuitemsetbitmaps}
-\constfunc{void}{SetBitmaps}{\param{const wxBitmap\& }{checked},
+\constfunc{void}{SetBitmaps}{\param{const wxBitmap& }{checked},
- \param{const wxBitmap\& }{unchecked = wxNullBitmap}}
+ \param{const wxBitmap& }{unchecked = wxNullBitmap}}
 Sets the checked/unchecked bitmaps for the menu item (Windows only). The first bitmap
 is also used as the single bitmap for uncheckable menu items.
 \membersection{wxMenuItem::SetFont}\label{wxmenuitemsetfont}
-\constfunc{void}{SetFont}{\param{const wxFont\& }{font}}
+\constfunc{void}{SetFont}{\param{const wxFont& }{font}}
 Sets the font associated with the menu item (Windows only).
 \membersection{wxMenuItem::SetHelp}\label{wxmenuitemsethelp}
-\constfunc{void}{SetHelp}{\param{const wxString\& }{helpString}}
+\constfunc{void}{SetHelp}{\param{const wxString& }{helpString}}
 Sets the help string.
@@ -173,19 +173,14 @@ Sets the width of the menu item checkmark bitmap (Windows only).
 \membersection{wxMenuItem::SetName}\label{wxmenuitemsetname}
-\constfunc{void}{SetName}{\param{const wxString\& }{text}}
+\constfunc{void}{SetName}{\param{const wxString& }{text}}
 Sets the text associated with the menu item.
 \membersection{wxMenuItem::SetTextColour}\label{wxmenuitemsettextcolour}
-\constfunc{void}{SetTextColour}{\param{const wxColour\& }{colour}}
+\constfunc{void}{SetTextColour}{\param{const wxColour& }{colour}}
 Sets the text colour associated with the menu item (Windows only).
 %%% Local Variables: 
 %%% mode: latex
 %%% TeX-master: "referenc"
 %%% End: 
--- a/docs/latex/wx/mouseevt.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/mouseevt.tex
@@ -26,7 +26,6 @@ functions that take a wxMouseEvent argument.
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_MOTION(func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_MOTION event.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_ENTER\_WINDOW(func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_ENTER\_WINDOW event.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_LEAVE\_WINDOW(func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_LEAVE\_WINDOW event.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_MOUSE\_EVENTS(func)}}{Process all mouse events.}
 \end{twocollist}%
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/radiobox.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/radiobox.tex
@@ -21,14 +21,6 @@ labelled buttons.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_RADIOBOX(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_RADIOBOX\_SELECTED event,
 when a radiobutton is clicked.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{Event handling overview}{eventhandlingoverview}, \helpref{wxRadioButton}{wxradiobutton},\rtfsp
--- a/docs/latex/wx/radiobut.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/radiobut.tex
@@ -16,14 +16,6 @@ There are no specific styles for this class.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_RADIOBUTTON(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_RADIOBUTTON\_SELECTED event,
 when the radiobutton is clicked.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{Event handling overview}{eventhandlingoverview}, \helpref{wxRadioBox}{wxradiobox},\rtfsp
--- a/docs/latex/wx/referenc.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/referenc.tex
@@ -1,12 +1,4 @@
-\documentstyle[a4,11pt,makeidx,verbatim,texhelp,fancyheadings,palatino]{thesis}
+\documentstyle[a4,makeidx,verbatim,texhelp,fancyhea,mysober,mytitle]{report}
 %KB:
 \addtolength{\textwidth}{1in}
 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5in}
 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.5in}
 \addtolength{\textheight}{1in}
 \sloppy
 %end of my changes
 %\documentstyle[a4,makeidx,verbatim,texhelp,fancyhea,mysober,mytitle]{report}
 \newcommand{\indexit}[1]{#1\index{#1}}
 \newcommand{\pipe}[0]{$\|$\ }%
 \input psbox.tex
@@ -17,8 +9,8 @@
 \parskip=10pt
 \parindent=0pt
 \title{Reference Manual for wxWindows 2.0: a portable C++ GUI toolkit}
-\author{Julian Smart}
+\author{Julian Smart and Markus Holzem}
-\date{July 31st 1998}
+\date{October 21st 1997}
 \makeindex
 \begin{document}
@@ -37,8 +29,7 @@
 \setfooter{\thepage}{}{}{}{}{\thepage}
 \begin{center}
-Copyright (c) 1998 Julian Smart, Markus Holzem, Robert Roebling and other
+Copyright (c) 1997 Julian Smart and Markus Holzem\\
 members of the wxWindows team\\
 Portions (c) 1996 Artificial Intelligence Applications Institute\\
 \end{center}
@@ -52,7 +43,7 @@ IMPLIED OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY WARRANTY OF
 MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
 IN NO EVENT SHALL THE ARTIFICIAL INTELLIGENCE APPLICATIONS INSTITUTE OR THE
-UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH OR ANY MEMBERS OF THE WXWINDOWS TEAM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
+UNIVERSITY OF EDINBURGH OR JULIAN SMART OR MARKUS HOLZEM BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT OR
 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM
 LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
 DAMAGE, AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH
--- a/docs/latex/wx/scrolbar.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/scrolbar.tex
@@ -12,6 +12,16 @@ events are received.
 \helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
 \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
 \wxheading{Window styles}
 \twocolwidtha{5cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSB\_HORIZONTAL}}{Specifies a horizontal scrollbar.}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSB\_VERTICAL}}{Specifies a vertical scrollbar.}
 \end{twocollist}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 A scrollbar has the following main attributes: {\it range}, {\it thumb size}, {\it page size}, and {\it position}.
@@ -35,16 +45,6 @@ be called initially, from an {\bf OnSize} event handler, and whenever the applic
 changes in size. It will adjust the view, object and page size according
 to the size of the window and the size of the data.
 \wxheading{Window styles}
 \twocolwidtha{5cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSB\_HORIZONTAL}}{Specifies a horizontal scrollbar.}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSB\_VERTICAL}}{Specifies a vertical scrollbar.}
 \end{twocollist}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 To process input from a scrollbar, use one of these event handler macros to direct input to member
@@ -61,7 +61,7 @@ functions that take a \helpref{wxScrollEvent}{wxscrollevent} argument:
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_PAGEDOWN(id, func)}}{Catch a page down command.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_THUMBTRACK(id, func)}}{Catch a thumbtrack command (continuous movement of the scroll thumb).}
 \end{twocollist}%
-
+%
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{Scrolling overview}{scrollingoverview},\rtfsp
--- a/docs/latex/wx/scrolwin.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/scrolwin.tex
@@ -130,7 +130,8 @@ scrolling in that direction.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxScrolledWindow::SetScrollbars}{wxscrolledwindowsetscrollbars},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxScrolledWindow::GetVirtualSize}{wxscrolledwindowgetvirtualsize}
+\helpref{wxScrolledWindow::GetVirtualSize}{wxscrolledwindowgetvirtualsize},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPage}{wxwindowgetscrollpage}
 \membersection{wxScrolledWindow::GetVirtualSize}\label{wxscrolledwindowgetvirtualsize}
@@ -154,7 +155,8 @@ to translate these units to logical units.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxScrolledWindow::SetScrollbars}{wxscrolledwindowsetscrollbars},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxScrolledWindow::GetScrollPixelsPerUnit}{wxscrolledwindowgetscrollpixelsperunit}
+\helpref{wxScrolledWindow::GetScrollPixelsPerUnit}{wxscrolledwindowgetscrollpixelsperunit},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPage}{wxwindowgetscrollpage}
 \membersection{wxScrolledWindow::IsRetained}\label{wxscrolledwindowisretained}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/slider.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/slider.tex
@@ -31,25 +31,6 @@ Slider events are handled in the same way as a scrollbar.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 To process input from a slider, use one of these event handler macros to direct input to member
 functions that take a \helpref{wxScrollEvent}{wxscrollevent} argument:
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_SCROLL(id, func)}}{Catch all scroll commands.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_TOP(id, func)}}{Catch a command to put the scroll thumb at the maximum position.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_BOTTOM(id, func)}}{Catch a command to put the scroll thumb at the maximum position.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_LINEUP(id, func)}}{Catch a line up command.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_LINEDOWN(id, func)}}{Catch a line down command.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_PAGEUP(id, func)}}{Catch a page up command.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_PAGEDOWN(id, func)}}{Catch a page down command.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_COMMAND\_THUMBTRACK(id, func)}}{Catch a thumbtrack command (continuous movement of the scroll thumb).}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_SLIDER(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_SLIDER\_UPDATED event,
 when the slider is moved. Though provided for backward compatibility, this is obsolete.}
 \end{twocollist}%
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{Event handling overview}{eventhandlingoverview}, \helpref{wxScrollBar}{wxscrollbar}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/statusbr.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/statusbr.tex
@@ -10,11 +10,7 @@ be variable length according to the size of the window.
 \wxheading{Window styles}
-\twocolwidtha{5cm}
+There are no special styles for this window.
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxSB\_SIZEGRIP}}{On Windows 95, displays a gripper at right-hand side of
 the status bar.}
 \end{twocollist}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
--- a/docs/latex/wx/tabctrl.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/tabctrl.tex
@@ -188,7 +188,7 @@ Sets the client data for a tab.
 \func{bool}{SetItemImage}{\param{int}{ item}, \param{int }{image}}
 Sets the image index for the given tab. {\it image} is an index into
-the image list which was set with \helpref{wxTabCtrl::SetImageList}{wxtabctrlsetimagelist}.
+the image list which was set with \helpref{wxTabCtrl::SetImageList}{setimagelist}.
 \membersection{wxTabCtrl::SetImageList}\label{wxtabctrlsetimagelist}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/tdocview.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/tdocview.tex
@@ -2,7 +2,6 @@
 Classes: \helpref{wxDocument}{wxdocument}, \helpref{wxView}{wxview}, \helpref{wxDocTemplate}{wxdoctemplate},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxDocManager}{wxdocmanager}, \helpref{wxDocParentFrame}{wxdocparentframe}, \helpref{wxDocChildFrame}{wxdocchildframe},
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxDocMDIParentFrame}{wxdocmdiparentframe}, \helpref{wxDocMDIChildFrame}{wxdocmdichildframe},
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxCommand}{wxcommand}, \helpref{wxCommandProcessor}{wxcommandprocessor}
 The document/view framework is found in most application frameworks, because it
@@ -255,28 +254,42 @@ the file history, that will be used for appending the filenames. They are
 appended using menu identifiers in the range wxID\_FILE1 to wxID\_FILE9.
 In order to respond to a file load command from one of these identifiers,
-you need to handle them using an event handler, for example:
+you need to handle them in your wxFrame::OnMenuCommand. Below is the
 code used by the default document/view parent frame.
 {\small
 \begin{verbatim}
-BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(wxDocParentFrame, wxFrame)
+void wxDocParentFrame::OnMenuCommand(int id)
    EVT_MENU(wxID_EXIT, wxDocParentFrame::OnExit)
    EVT_MENU_RANGE(wxID_FILE1, wxID_FILE9, wxDocParentFrame::OnMRUFile)
 END_EVENT_TABLE()
 void wxDocParentFrame::OnExit(wxCommandEvent& WXUNUSED(event))
 {
-    Close();
+  switch (id)
-}
+  {
-
+    case wxID_EXIT:
-void wxDocParentFrame::OnMRUFile(wxCommandEvent& event)
+    {
-{
+      if (GetEventHandler()->OnClose())
-      wxString f(m_docManager->GetHistoryFile(event.GetSelection() - wxID_FILE1));
+        delete this;
-      if (f != "")
+      break;
-        (void)m_docManager->CreateDocument(f, wxDOC_SILENT);
+    }
    case wxID_FILE1:
    case wxID_FILE2:
    case wxID_FILE3:
    case wxID_FILE4:
    case wxID_FILE5:
    case wxID_FILE6:
    case wxID_FILE7:
    case wxID_FILE8:
    case wxID_FILE9:
    {
      char *f = docManager->GetHistoryFile(id-wxID_FILE1);
      if (f)
        (void)docManager->CreateDocument(f, wxDOC_SILENT);
      break;
    }
    default:
    {
      docManager->OnMenuCommand(id);
    }
  }
 }
 \end{verbatim}
 }
 \subsection{wxWindows predefined command identifiers}\label{predefinedids}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/texhelp.sty
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/texhelp.sty
@@ -290,9 +290,3 @@
 \newcommand{\constfunc}[3]{{\bf #1} {\bf #2}(#3) {\bf const}\index{#2}}
 \newcommand{\windowstyle}[1]{{\bf #1}\index{#1}}
 \addtolength{\textwidth}{1in}
 \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-0.5in}
 \addtolength{\topmargin}{-0.5in}
 \addtolength{\textheight}{1in}
 \sloppy
--- a/docs/latex/wx/text.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/text.tex
@@ -46,19 +46,6 @@ as the following:
 If your compiler does not support derivation from {\bf streambuf} and gives a compile error, define the symbol {\bf NO\_TEXT\_WINDOW\_STREAM} in the
 wxTextCtrl header file.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 To process input from a text control, use these event handler macros to direct input to member
 functions that take a \helpref{wxCommandEvent}{wxcommandevent} argument.
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}%
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TEXT(id, func)}}{Respond to a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TEXT\_UPDATED event,
 generated when the text changes.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TEXT\_ENTER(id, func)}}{Respond to a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TEXT\_ENTER event,
 generated when enter is pressed in a single-line text control.}
 \end{twocollist}%
 %\wxheading{See also}
 %
 %\helpref{wxRichTextCtrl}{wxrichtextctrl}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/thread.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/thread.tex
@@ -52,7 +52,7 @@ calling thread.
 \func{wxThreadError}{Destroy}{\void}
-Destroys the thread immediately unless the application has specified deferral via \helpref{wxThread::DeferDestroy}{wxthreaddeferdestroy}.
+Destroys the thread immediately unless the application has specified deferral via \helpref{wxThread::DeferDestroy}{deferdestroy}.
 \wxheading{Return value}
@@ -80,9 +80,9 @@ The following priorities are already defined:
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD\_MIN\_PRIORITY}}{0}
+\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD_MIN_PRIORITY}}{0}
-\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD\_DEFAULT\_PRIORITY}}{50}
+\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD_DEFAULT_PRIORITY}}{50}
-\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD\_MAX\_PRIORITY}}{100}
+\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD_MAX_PRIORITY}}{100}
 \end{twocollist}
 \membersection{wxThread::IsAlive}\label{wxthreadisalive}
@@ -119,13 +119,8 @@ The following priorities are already defined:
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
-\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD\_MIN\_PRIORITY}}{0}
+\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD_MIN_PRIORITY}}{0}
-\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD\_DEFAULT\_PRIORITY}}{50}
+\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD_DEFAULT_PRIORITY}}{50}
-\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD\_MAX\_PRIORITY}}{100}
+\twocolitem{{\bf WXTHREAD_MAX_PRIORITY}}{100}
 \end{twocollist}
 %%% Local Variables: 
 %%% mode: latex
 %%% TeX-master: "referenc"
 %%% End: 
--- a/docs/latex/wx/toolbar.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/toolbar.tex
@@ -1,23 +1,12 @@
-\section{\class{wxToolBar}}\label{wxtoolbar}
+\section{\class{wxToolBarBase}}\label{wxtoolbarbase}
-The name wxToolBar is defined to be a synonym for one of the following classes:
+{\bf wxToolBarBase} is the base class for a number of toolbar classes.  The most portable
-
+one of these is the generic \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple} class. {\bf wxToolBarBase} defines
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
+automatic scrolling management functionality which is identical to \helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow},
-\item {\bf wxToolBar95} The native Windows 95 toolbar. Used on Windows 95, NT 4 and above.
+so please refer to this class also.
 \item {\bf wxToolBarMSW} A Windows implementation. Used on 16-bit Windows.
 \item {\bf wxToolBarGTK} The GTK toolbar.
 \item {\bf wxToolBarSimple} A simple implementation, with scrolling.
 Used on platforms with no native toolbar control, or where scrolling is required.
 \end{itemize}
 Note that the base class {\bf wxToolBarBase} defines
 automatic scrolling management functionality which is identical
 to \helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow}, so please refer to this class also.
 Not all toolbars support scrolling, but wxToolBarSimple does.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 wxToolBarBase\\
 \helpref{wxControl}{wxcontrol}\\
 \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
 \helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
@@ -25,107 +14,58 @@ wxToolBarBase\\
 \wxheading{Remarks}
-You may also create a toolbar that is managed by the frame, by
+Because there is a variety of toolbar classes, you may wish to choose which class
-calling \helpref{wxFrame::CreateToolBar}{wxframecreatetoolbar}.
+is best for your application on each platform, and define {\bf wxToolBar} appropriately. For example:
-{\bf wxToolBar95:} Note that this toolbar paints tools to reflect user-selected colours.
+\begin{verbatim}
-The toolbar orientation must always be {\bf wxVERTICAL}.
+#if WIN95
 class wxToolBar: public wxToolBar95
 #elif defined(wx_msw)
 class wxToolBar: public wxToolBarMSW
 #else
 class wxToolBar: public wxToolBarSimple
 #endif
 {
 };
 \end{verbatim}
-\wxheading{Window styles}
+TODO: maybe change the confusing names: GetDefaultSize becomes GetToolBitmapSize, and
-
+GetDefaultButtonSize becomes GetToolSize. Document SetRows for wxToolBar95, and make it
-\twocolwidtha{5cm}
+part of the base API?
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTB\_FLAT}}{Gives the toolbar a flat look ('coolbar' or 'flatbar' style). Windows 95 only.}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTB\_HORIZONTAL}}{Specifies horizontal layout.}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTB\_VERTICAL}}{Specifies vertical layout (not available for the Windows 95
 toolbar).}
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTB\_3DBUTTONS}}{Gives wxToolBarSimple a mild 3D look to its buttons.}
 \end{twocollist}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
-The toolbar class emits menu commands in the same was that a frame menubar does,
+Derive a new class from an existing toolbar class, and override appropriate virtual functions.
 so you can use one EVT\_MENU macro for both a menu item and a toolbar button.
 The event handler functions take a wxCommandEvent argument. For most event macros,
 the identifier of the tool is passed, but for EVT\_TOOL\_ENTER the toolbar
 window is passed and the tool id is retrieved from the wxCommandEvent.
 This is because the id may be -1 when the mouse moves off a tool, and -1 is not
 allowed as an identifier in the event system.
-\twocolwidtha{7cm}
+TODO: make consistent with other event handling; have wxToolBarEvent and appropriate macros.
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_CLICKED event
 (a synonym for wxEVT\_COMMAND\_MENU\_SELECTED). Pass the id of the tool.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_MENU(id, func)}}{The same as EVT\_TOOL.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_RANGE(id1, id2, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_CLICKED event
 for a range id identifiers. Pass the ids of the tools.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_MENU\_RANGE(id1, id2, func)}}{The same as EVT\_TOOL\_RANGE.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_RCLICKED(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_RCLICKED event.
 Pass the id of the tool.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_RCLICKED\_RANGE(id1, id2, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_RCLICKED event
 for a range of ids. Pass the ids of the tools.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TOOL\_ENTER(id, func)}}{Process a wxEVT\_COMMAND\_TOOL\_ENTER event.
 Pass the id of the toolbar itself. The value of wxCommandEvent::GetSelection is the tool id, or -1 if the mouse cursor has moved off a tool.}
 \end{twocollist}
 \wxheading{See also}
 \overview{Toolbar overview}{wxtoolbaroverview},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarMSW}{wxtoolbarmsw},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBar95}{wxtoolbar95},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::wxToolBar}\label{wxtoolbarconstr}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::wxToolBarBase}\label{wxtoolbarbaseconstr}
-\func{}{wxToolBar}{\void}
+\func{}{wxToolBarBase}{\void}
 Default constructor.
-\func{}{wxToolBar}{\param{wxWindow*}{ parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id},
+%\wxheading{See also}
- \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition},
+%
- \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize},
+%\helpref{wxToolBarBase::Create}{wxtoolbarbasecreate}
- \param{long }{style = wxTB\_HORIZONTAL \pipe wxNO\_BORDER},
+%
- \param{const wxString\& }{name = wxPanelNameStr}}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::\destruct{wxToolBarBase}}
-Constructs a toolbar.
+\func{void}{\destruct{wxToolBarBase}}{\void}
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{parent}{Pointer to a parent window.}
 \docparam{id}{Window identifier. If -1, will automatically create an identifier.}
 \docparam{pos}{Window position. wxDefaultPosition is (-1, -1) which indicates that wxWindows
 should generate a default position for the window. If using the wxWindow class directly, supply
 an actual position.}
 \docparam{size}{Window size. wxDefaultSize is (-1, -1) which indicates that wxWindows
 should generate a default size for the window.}
 \docparam{style}{Window style. See \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar} for details.}
 \docparam{name}{Window name.}
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 After a toolbar is created, you use \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool} and
 perhaps \helpref{wxToolBar::AddSeparator}{wxtoolbaraddseparator}, and then you
 must call \helpref{wxToolBar::Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize} to construct and display the toolbar
 tools.
 You may also create a toolbar that is managed by the frame, by
 calling \helpref{wxFrame::CreateToolBar}{wxframecreatetoolbar}.
 \membersection{wxToolBar::\destruct{wxToolBar}}
 \func{void}{\destruct{wxToolBar}}{\void}
 Toolbar destructor.
-\membersection{wxToolBar::AddSeparator}\label{wxtoolbaraddseparator}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::AddSeparator}\label{wxtoolbarbaseaddseparator}
 \func{void}{AddSeparator}{\void}
@@ -133,14 +73,14 @@ Adds a separator for spacing groups of tools.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool}, \helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolSeparation}{wxtoolbarsettoolseparation}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool}, \helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolSeparation}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolseparation}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::AddTool}\label{wxtoolbaraddtool}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}\label{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool}
-\func{wxToolBarTool*}{AddTool}{\param{int}{ toolIndex}, \param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap1},\rtfsp
+\func{wxToolBarBaseTool*}{AddTool}{\param{int}{ toolIndex}, \param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap1},\rtfsp
-\param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap2 = wxNullBitmap}, \param{bool}{ isToggle = FALSE},\rtfsp
+\param{const wxBitmap\&}{ bitmap2 = (wxBitmap *)NULL}, \param{const bool}{ isToggle = FALSE},\rtfsp
-\param{long}{ xPos = -1}, \param{long}{ yPos = -1},\rtfsp
+\param{const float}{ xPos = -1}, \param{const float}{ yPos = -1},\rtfsp
-\param{wxObject* }{clientData = NULL}, \param{const wxString\& }{shortHelpString = ""}, \param{const wxString\& }{longHelpString = ""}}
+\param{wxObject *}{clientData = NULL}, \param{const wxString\& }{shortHelpString = ""}, \param{const wxString\& }{longHelpString = ""}}
 Adds a tool to the toolbar.
@@ -166,7 +106,7 @@ wxBitmap object.}
 \docparam{yPos}{Specifies the y position of the tool if automatic layout is not suitable.}
 \docparam{clientData}{An optional pointer to client data which can be
-retrieved later using \helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolClientData}{wxtoolbargettoolclientdata}.}
+retrieved later using \helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetToolClientData}{wxtoolbarbasegettoolclientdata}.}
 \docparam{shortHelpString}{Used for displaying a tooltip for the tool in the
 Windows 95 implementation of wxButtonBar. Pass the empty string if this is not required.}
@@ -174,31 +114,29 @@ Windows 95 implementation of wxButtonBar. Pass the empty string if this is not r
 \docparam{longHelpString}{Used to displayer longer help, such as status line help.
 Pass the empty string if this is not required.}
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 After you have added tools to a toolbar, you must call \helpref{wxToolBar::Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize} in
 order to have the tools appear.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::AddSeparator}{wxtoolbaraddseparator},
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddSeparator}{wxtoolbarbaseaddseparator}
 \helpref{wxToolBar::Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize},
-\membersection{wxToolBar::CreateTools}\label{wxtoolbarcreatetools}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::CreateTools}\label{wxtoolbarbasecreatetools}
 \func{bool}{CreateTools}{\void}
-This function is implemented for some toolbar classes to create the tools and display them.
+Call this function after all tools have been added to the toolbar, to actually
-The portable way of calling it is to call \helpref{wxToolBar::Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize} after
+create the tools.
-you have added tools and separators.
+
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 Strictly speaking, this is required only for the Windows 95 version of wxButtonBar,
 but for portability it should be called anyway.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool}, \helpref{wxToolBar::Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::DrawTool}\label{wxtoolbardrawtool}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::DrawTool}\label{wxtoolbarbasedrawtool}
-\func{void}{DrawTool}{\param{wxMemoryDC\& }{memDC}, \param{wxToolBarTool* }{tool}}
+\func{void}{DrawTool}{\param{wxMemoryDC\& }{memDC}, \param{wxToolBarBaseTool* }{tool}}
 Draws the specified tool onto the window using the given memory device context.
@@ -212,7 +150,7 @@ Draws the specified tool onto the window using the given memory device context.
 For internal use only.
-\membersection{wxToolBar::EnableTool}\label{wxtoolbarenabletool}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::EnableTool}\label{wxtoolbarbaseenabletool}
 \func{void}{EnableTool}{\param{int }{toolIndex}, \param{const bool}{ enable}}
@@ -226,18 +164,18 @@ Enables or disables the tool.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
-For wxToolBarSimple, does nothing. Some other implementations
+For \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple}, does nothing. Some other implementations
 will change the visible state of the tool to indicate that it is disabled.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolEnabled}{wxtoolbargettoolenabled},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetToolEnabled}{wxtoolbarbasegettoolenabled},\rtfsp
-%\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolState}{wxtoolbarsettoolstate},\rtfsp
+%\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolState}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolstate},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::ToggleTool}{wxtoolbartoggletool}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::ToggleTool}{wxtoolbarbasetoggletool}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::FindToolForPosition}\label{wxtoolbarfindtoolforposition}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::FindToolForPosition}\label{wxtoolbarbasefindtoolforposition}
-\constfunc{wxToolBarTool*}{FindToolForPosition}{\param{const float}{ x}, \param{const float}{ y}}
+\constfunc{wxToolBarBaseTool*}{FindToolForPosition}{\param{const float}{ x}, \param{const float}{ y}}
 Finds a tool for the given mouse position.
@@ -255,35 +193,35 @@ A pointer to a tool if a tool is found, or NULL otherwise.
 Used internally, and should not need to be used by the programmer.
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolSize}\label{wxtoolbargettoolsize}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetDefaultButtonSize}\label{wxtoolbarbasegetdefaultbuttonsize}
-\func{wxSize}{GetToolSize}{\void}
+\func{wxSize}{GetDefaultButtonSize}{\void}
 Returns the size of a whole button, which is usually larger than a tool bitmap because
 of added 3D effects.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolBitmapSize}{wxtoolbarsettoolbitmapsize},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetDefaultSize}{wxtoolbarbasesetdefaultsize},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolBitmapSize}{wxtoolbargettoolbitmapsize}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetDefaultSize}{wxtoolbarbasegetdefaultsize}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolBitmapSize}\label{wxtoolbargettoolbitmapsize}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetDefaultSize}\label{wxtoolbarbasegetdefaultsize}
-\func{wxSize}{GetToolBitmapSize}{\void}
+\func{wxSize}{GetDefaultSize}{\void}
 Returns the size of bitmap that the toolbar expects to have. The default bitmap size is 16 by 15 pixels.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
-Note that this is the size of the bitmap you pass to \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool},
+Note that this is the size of the bitmap you pass to \helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool},
 and not the eventual size of the tool button.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolBitmapSize}{wxtoolbarsettoolbitmapsize},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetDefaultSize}{wxtoolbarbasesetdefaultsize},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolSize}{wxtoolbargettoolsize}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetDefaultButtonSize}{wxtoolbarbasegetdefaultbuttonsize}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetMargins}\label{wxtoolbargetmargins}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetMargins}\label{wxtoolbarbasegetmargins}
 \constfunc{wxSize}{GetMargins}{\void}
@@ -291,9 +229,9 @@ Returns the left/right and top/bottom margins, which are also used for inter-too
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetMargins}{wxtoolbarsetmargins}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetMargins}{wxtoolbarbasesetmargins}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetMaxSize}\label{wxtoolbargetmaxsize}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetMaxSize}\label{wxtoolbarbasegetmaxsize}
 \constfunc{void}{GetMaxSize}{\param{float*}{ w}, \param{float*}{ h}}
@@ -306,7 +244,7 @@ This can be used to size a frame around the toolbar window.
 \docparam{h}{Receives the maximum vertical size.}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolClientData}\label{wxtoolbargettoolclientdata}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetToolClientData}\label{wxtoolbarbasegettoolclientdata}
 \constfunc{wxObject*}{GetToolClientData}{\param{int }{toolIndex}}
@@ -314,13 +252,13 @@ Get any client data associated with the tool.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{toolIndex}{Index of the tool, as passed to \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool}.}
+\docparam{toolIndex}{Index of the tool, as passed to \helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool}.}
 \wxheading{Return value}
 Client data, or NULL if there is none.
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolEnabled}\label{wxtoolbargettoolenabled}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetToolEnabled}\label{wxtoolbarbasegettoolenabled}
 \constfunc{bool}{GetToolEnabled}{\param{int }{toolIndex}}
@@ -336,9 +274,9 @@ TRUE if the tool is enabled, FALSE otherwise.
 %\wxheading{See also}
 %
-%\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolEnabled}{wxtoolbarsettoolenabled}
+%\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolEnabled}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolenabled}
 %
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolLongHelp}\label{wxtoolbargettoollonghelp}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetToolLongHelp}\label{wxtoolbarbasegettoollonghelp}
 \constfunc{wxString}{GetToolLongHelp}{\param{int }{toolIndex}}
@@ -350,10 +288,10 @@ Returns the long help for the given tool.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbarsettoollonghelp},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbarbasesettoollonghelp},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbarsettoolshorthelp}\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolshorthelp}\rtfsp
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolPacking}\label{wxtoolbargettoolpacking}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetToolPacking}\label{wxtoolbarbasegettoolpacking}
 \constfunc{int}{GetToolPacking}{\void}
@@ -361,9 +299,9 @@ Returns the value used for packing tools.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolPacking}{wxtoolbarsettoolpacking}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolPacking}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolpacking}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolSeparation}\label{wxtoolbargettoolseparation}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetToolSeparation}\label{wxtoolbarbasegettoolseparation}
 \constfunc{int}{GetToolSeparation}{\void}
@@ -371,9 +309,9 @@ Returns the default separator size.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolSeparation}{wxtoolbarsettoolseparation}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolSeparation}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolseparation}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolShortHelp}\label{wxtoolbargettoolshorthelp}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetToolShortHelp}\label{wxtoolbarbasegettoolshorthelp}
 \constfunc{wxString}{GetToolShortHelp}{\param{int }{toolIndex}}
@@ -387,10 +325,10 @@ Returns the long help for the given tool.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbargettoollonghelp},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbarbasegettoollonghelp},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbarsettoolshorthelp}\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolshorthelp}\rtfsp
-\membersection{wxToolBar::GetToolState}\label{wxtoolbargettoolstate}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::GetToolState}\label{wxtoolbarbasegettoolstate}
 \constfunc{bool}{GetToolState}{\param{int }{toolIndex}}
@@ -406,9 +344,9 @@ TRUE if the tool is toggled on, FALSE otherwise.
 %\wxheading{See also}
 %
-%\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolState}{wxtoolbarsettoolstate}
+%\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolState}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolstate}
 %
-\membersection{wxToolBar::Layout}\label{wxtoolbarlayout}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::Layout}\label{wxtoolbarbaselayout}
 \func{void}{Layout}{\void}
@@ -416,26 +354,16 @@ Called by the application after the tools have been added to
 automatically lay the tools out on the window. If you have given
 absolute positions when adding the tools, do not call this.
-This function is only implemented for some toolbar classes.
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::OnLeftClick}\label{wxtoolbarbaseonleftclick}
 The portable way of calling it is to call \helpref{wxToolBar::Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize} after
 you have added tools and separators.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool}, \helpref{wxToolBar::Realize}{wxtoolbarrealize}
 \membersection{wxToolBar::OnLeftClick}\label{wxtoolbaronleftclick}
 \func{bool}{OnLeftClick}{\param{int}{ toolIndex}, \param{bool}{ toggleDown}}
-Called when the user clicks on a tool with the left mouse button.
+Called when the user clicks on a tool with the left mouse button. The
-
+programmer should override this function to detect left tool clicks.
 This is the old way of detecting tool clicks; although it will still work,
 you should use the EVT\_MENU or EVT\_TOOL macro instead.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{toolIndex}{The identifier passed to \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool}.}
+\docparam{toolIndex}{The identifier passed to \helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool}.}
 \docparam{toggleDown}{TRUE if the tool is a toggle and the toggle is down, otherwise is FALSE.}
@@ -447,19 +375,16 @@ specifying that toggle operations are not permitted in some circumstances.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::OnMouseEnter}{wxtoolbaronmouseenter},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::OnMouseEnter}{wxtoolbarbaseonmouseenter},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::OnRightClick}{wxtoolbaronrightclick}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::OnRightClick}{wxtoolbarbaseonrightclick}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::OnMouseEnter}\label{wxtoolbaronmouseenter}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::OnMouseEnter}\label{wxtoolbarbaseonmouseenter}
 \func{void}{OnMouseEnter}{\param{int}{ toolIndex}}
 This is called when the mouse cursor moves into a tool or out of
 the toolbar.
 This is the old way of detecting mouse enter events; although it will still work,
 you should use the EVT\_TOOL\_ENTER macro instead.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{toolIndex}{Greater than -1 if the mouse cursor has moved into the tool,
@@ -472,19 +397,16 @@ such as a short description on the status line.}
 With some derived toolbar classes, if the mouse moves quickly out of the toolbar, wxWindows may not be able to
 detect it. Therefore this function may not always be called when expected.
-\membersection{wxToolBar::OnRightClick}\label{wxtoolbaronrightclick}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::OnRightClick}\label{wxtoolbarbaseonrightclick}
 \func{void}{OnRightClick}{\param{int}{ toolIndex}, \param{float}{ x}, \param{float}{ y}}
 Called when the user clicks on a tool with the right mouse button. The
 programmer should override this function to detect right tool clicks.
 This is the old way of detecting tool right clicks; although it will still work,
 you should use the EVT\_TOOL\_RCLICKED macro instead.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
-\docparam{toolIndex}{The identifier passed to \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool}.}
+\docparam{toolIndex}{The identifier passed to \helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool}.}
 \docparam{x}{The x position of the mouse cursor.}
@@ -496,24 +418,12 @@ A typical use of this member might be to pop up a menu.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::OnMouseEnter}{wxtoolbaronmouseenter},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::OnMouseEnter}{wxtoolbarbaseonmouseenter},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::OnLeftClick}{wxtoolbaronleftclick}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::OnLeftClick}{wxtoolbarbaseonleftclick}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::Realize}\label{wxtoolbarrealize}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::SetDefaultSize}\label{wxtoolbarbasesetdefaultsize}
-\func{bool}{Realize}{\void}
+\func{void}{SetDefaultSize}{\param{const wxSize\&}{ size}}
 This function should be called after you have added tools. It
 calls, according to the implementation,
 either \helpref{wxToolBar::CreateTools}{wxtoolbarcreatetools} or
 \helpref{wxToolBar::Layout}{wxtoolbarlayout}.
 If you are using absolute positions for your tools when using a wxToolBarSimple object,
 do not call this function. You must call it at all other times.
 \membersection{wxToolBar::SetToolBitmapSize}\label{wxtoolbarsettoolbitmapsize}
 \func{void}{SetToolBitmapSize}{\param{const wxSize\&}{ size}}
 Sets the default size of each tool bitmap. The default bitmap size is 16 by 15 pixels.
@@ -526,15 +436,15 @@ Sets the default size of each tool bitmap. The default bitmap size is 16 by 15 p
 This should be called to tell the toolbar what the tool bitmap size is. Call
 it before you add tools.
-Note that this is the size of the bitmap you pass to \helpref{wxToolBar::AddTool}{wxtoolbaraddtool},
+Note that this is the size of the bitmap you pass to \helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddTool}{wxtoolbarbaseaddtool},
 and not the eventual size of the tool button.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolBitmapSize}{wxtoolbargettoolbitmapsize},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetDefaultSize}{wxtoolbarbasegetdefaultsize},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolSize}{wxtoolbargettoolsize}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetDefaultButtonSize}{wxtoolbarbasegetdefaultbuttonsize}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::SetMargins}\label{wxtoolbarsetmargins}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::SetMargins}\label{wxtoolbarbasesetmargins}
 \func{void}{SetMargins}{\param{const wxSize\&}{ size}}
@@ -557,9 +467,9 @@ default (zero-size) margins are to be overridden.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetMargins}{wxtoolbargetmargins}, \helpref{wxSize}{wxsize}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetMargins}{wxtoolbarbasegetmargins}, \helpref{wxSize}{wxsize}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::SetToolLongHelp}\label{wxtoolbarsettoollonghelp}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::SetToolLongHelp}\label{wxtoolbarbasesettoollonghelp}
 \func{void}{SetToolLongHelp}{\param{int }{toolIndex}, \param{const wxString\& }{helpString}}
@@ -577,10 +487,10 @@ You might use the long help for displaying the tool purpose on the status line.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbargettoollonghelp},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbarbasegettoollonghelp},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbarsettoolshorthelp},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbarbasesettoolshorthelp},\rtfsp
-\membersection{wxToolBar::SetToolPacking}\label{wxtoolbarsettoolpacking}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::SetToolPacking}\label{wxtoolbarbasesettoolpacking}
 \func{void}{SetToolPacking}{\param{int}{ packing}}
@@ -597,9 +507,9 @@ and for spacing in the horizontal direction if the toolbar is vertical.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolPacking}{wxtoolbargettoolpacking}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetToolPacking}{wxtoolbarbasegettoolpacking}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::SetToolShortHelp}\label{wxtoolbarsettoolshorthelp}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::SetToolShortHelp}\label{wxtoolbarbasesettoolshorthelp}
 \func{void}{SetToolShortHelp}{\param{int }{toolIndex}, \param{const wxString\& }{helpString}}
@@ -617,9 +527,9 @@ An application might use short help for identifying the tool purpose in a toolti
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbargettoolshorthelp}, \helpref{wxToolBar::SetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbarsettoollonghelp}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetToolShortHelp}{wxtoolbarbasegettoolshorthelp}, \helpref{wxToolBarBase::SetToolLongHelp}{wxtoolbarbasesettoollonghelp}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::SetToolSeparation}\label{wxtoolbarsettoolseparation}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::SetToolSeparation}\label{wxtoolbarbasesettoolseparation}
 \func{void}{SetToolSeparation}{\param{int}{ separation}}
@@ -631,9 +541,9 @@ Sets the default separator size. The default value is 5.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::AddSeparator}{wxtoolbaraddseparator}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::AddSeparator}{wxtoolbarbaseaddseparator}
-\membersection{wxToolBar::ToggleTool}\label{wxtoolbartoggletool}
+\membersection{wxToolBarBase::ToggleTool}\label{wxtoolbarbasetoggletool}
 \func{void}{ToggleTool}{\param{int }{toolIndex}, \param{const bool}{ toggle}}
@@ -651,6 +561,213 @@ Only applies to a tool that has been specified as a toggle tool.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxToolBar::GetToolState}{wxtoolbargettoolstate}
+\helpref{wxToolBarBase::GetToolState}{wxtoolbarbasegettoolstate}
 \section{\class{wxToolBar95}}\label{wxtoolbar95}
 This class should be used when a 3D-effect toolbar is required under Windows 95.
 It uses the native toolbar control.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}\\
 \helpref{wxControl}{wxcontrol}\\
 \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
 \helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
 \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
 \wxheading{Window styles}
 \twocolwidtha{5cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTB\_FLAT}}{Gives the toolbar a flat look ('coolbar' or 'flatbar' style).}
 \end{twocollist}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 Note that this toolbar paints tools to reflect user-selected colours.
 The toolbar orientation must always be {\bf wxVERTICAL}.
 For member functions, see the documentation for \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \overview{Toolbar overview}{wxtoolbaroverview},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarMSW}{wxtoolbarmsw}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
 \membersection{wxToolBar95::wxToolBar95}\label{wxtoolbar95constr}
 \func{}{wxToolBar95}{\param{wxWindow*}{ parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id},\rtfsp
 \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize},\rtfsp
 \param{long }{style = 0}, \param{int }{orientation = wxVERTICAL},\rtfsp
 \param{int }{nRowsOrColumns = 1}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = ``toolBar"}}
 Constructs a toolbar.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{parent}{Parent window. Must not be NULL.}
 \docparam{id}{Window identifier. A value of -1 indicates a default value.}
 \docparam{pos}{Window position. If the position (-1, -1) is specified then a default position is chosen.}
 \docparam{size}{Window size. If the default size (-1, -1) is specified then a default size is chosen.}
 \docparam{orientation}{Specifies a wxVERTICAL or wxHORIZONTAL orientation for laying out
 the toolbar.}
 \docparam{nRowsOrColumns}{Specifies the number of rows or
 columns, whose meaning depends on {\it orientation}.  If laid out
 vertically, {\it nRowsOrColumns} specifies the number of rows to draw
 before the next column is started; if horizontal, it refers to the
 number of columns to draw before the next row is started.}
 \docparam{style}{Window style. See \helpref{wxToolBar95}{wxtoolbar95}.}
 \docparam{name}{Window name.}
 \section{\class{wxToolBarMSW}}\label{wxtoolbarmsw}
 This class should be used when a 3D-effect toolbar is required for Windows versions earlier
 than Windows 95.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}\\
 \helpref{wxControl}{wxcontrol}\\
 \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
 \helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
 \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
 \wxheading{Window styles}
 There are no specific styles for this class.
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 Note that this toolbar does not paint tools to reflect user-selected colours: grey shading is used.
 For member functions, see the documentation for \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \overview{Toolbar overview}{wxtoolbaroverview},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBar95}{wxtoolbar95}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
 \membersection{wxToolBarMSW::wxToolBarMSW}\label{wxtoolbarmswconstr}
 \func{}{wxToolBarMSW}{\param{wxWindow*}{ parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id},\rtfsp
 \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize},\rtfsp
 \param{long }{style = 0}, \param{int }{orientation = wxVERTICAL},\rtfsp
 \param{int }{nRowsOrColumns = 1}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = ``toolBar"}}
 Constructs a toolbar.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{parent}{Parent window. Must not be NULL.}
 \docparam{id}{Window identifier. A value of -1 indicates a default value.}
 \docparam{pos}{Window position. If the position (-1, -1) is specified then a default position is chosen.}
 \docparam{size}{Window size. If the default size (-1, -1) is specified then a default size is chosen.}
 \docparam{orientation}{Specifies a wxVERTICAL or wxHORIZONTAL orientation for laying out
 the toolbar.}
 \docparam{nRowsOrColumns}{Specifies the number of rows or
 columns, whose meaning depends on {\it orientation}.  If laid out
 vertically, {\it nRowsOrColumns} specifies the number of rows to draw
 before the next column is started; if horizontal, it refers to the
 number of columns to draw before the next row is started.}
 \docparam{style}{Window style. See \helpref{wxToolBarMSW}{wxtoolbarmsw}.}
 \docparam{name}{Window name.}
 \section{\class{wxToolBarSimple}}\label{wxtoolbarsimple}
 This is the generic toolbar class which has an identical appearance
 on all platforms.
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}\\
 \helpref{wxControl}{wxcontrol}\\
 \helpref{wxWindow}{wxwindow}\\
 \helpref{wxEvtHandler}{wxevthandler}\\
 \helpref{wxObject}{wxobject}
 \wxheading{Window styles}
 \twocolwidtha{5cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{\windowstyle{wxTB\_3DBUTTONS}}{Gives the simple toolbar a mild 3D look to its buttons.}
 \end{twocollist}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 In this class, disabling a toolbar tool does not change its appearance.
 For member functions, see the documentation for \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \overview{Toolbar overview}{wxtoolbaroverview},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBar95}{wxtoolbar95}
 \latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
 \membersection{wxToolBarSimple::wxToolBarSimple}\label{wxtoolbarsimpleconstr}
 \func{}{wxToolBarSimple}{\param{wxWindow*}{ parent}, \param{wxWindowID }{id},\rtfsp
 \param{const wxPoint\& }{pos = wxDefaultPosition}, \param{const wxSize\& }{size = wxDefaultSize},\rtfsp
 \param{long }{style = 0}, \param{int }{orientation = wxVERTICAL},\rtfsp
 \param{int }{nRowsOrColumns = 1}, \param{const wxString\& }{name = ``toolBar"}}
 Constructs a toolbar.
 \wxheading{Parameters}
 \docparam{parent}{Parent window. Must not be NULL.}
 \docparam{id}{Window identifier. A value of -1 indicates a default value.}
 \docparam{pos}{Window position. If the position (-1, -1) is specified then a default position is chosen.}
 \docparam{size}{Window size. If the default size (-1, -1) is specified then a default size is chosen.}
 \docparam{orientation}{Specifies a wxVERTICAL or wxHORIZONTAL orientation for laying out
 the toolbar.}
 \docparam{nRowsOrColumns}{Specifies the number of rows or
 columns, whose meaning depends on {\it orientation}.  If laid out
 vertically, {\it nRowsOrColumns} specifies the number of rows to draw
 before the next column is started; if horizontal, it refers to the
 number of columns to draw before the next row is started.}
 \docparam{style}{Window style. See \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple}.}
 \docparam{name}{Window name.}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/topics.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/topics.tex
@@ -8,6 +8,7 @@ This chapter contains a selection of topic overviews.
 \input tbitmap.tex
 \input tdialog.tex
 \input tfont.tex
 \input tstring.tex
 \input tsplittr.tex
 \input ttreectl.tex
 \input tlistctl.tex
@@ -32,6 +33,5 @@ This chapter contains a selection of topic overviews.
 \input tvalidat.tex
 \input texpr.tex
 \input tgrid.tex
 \input tstring.tex
 \input tusage.tex
--- a/docs/latex/wx/treectrl.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/treectrl.tex
@@ -24,27 +24,6 @@ able to edit labels in the tree control.}
 See also \helpref{window styles overview}{windowstyles}.
 \wxheading{Event handling}
 To process input from a tree control, use these event handler macros to direct input to member
 functions that take a \helpref{wxTreeEvent}{wxtreeevent} argument.
 \twocolwidtha{7cm}
 \begin{twocollist}\itemsep=0pt
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_BEGIN\_DRAG(id, func)}}{Begin dragging with the left mouse button.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_BEGIN\_RDRAG(id, func)}}{Begin dragging with the right mouse button.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_BEGIN\_LABEL\_EDIT(id, func)}}{Begin editing a label.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_END\_LABEL\_EDIT(id, func)}}{Finish editing a label.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_DELETE\_ITEM(id, func)}}{Delete an item.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_GET\_INFO(id, func)}}{Request information from the application.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_SET\_INFO(id, func)}}{Information is being supplied.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_ITEM\_EXPANDED(id, func)}}{Parent has been expanded.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_ITEM\_EXPANDING(id, func)}}{Parent is being expanded.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_SEL\_CHANGED(id, func)}}{Selection has changed.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_SEL\_CHANGING(id, func)}}{Selection is changing.}
 \twocolitem{{\bf EVT\_TREE\_KEY\_DOWN(id, func)}}{A key has been pressed.}
 \end{twocollist}%
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxTreeCtrl overview}{wxtreectrloverview}, \helpref{wxListBox}{wxlistbox}, \helpref{wxListCtrl}{wxlistctrl},\rtfsp
@@ -111,35 +90,12 @@ Deletes all the items in the control.
 Deletes the specified item.
-\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::EditLabel}\label{wxtreectrleditlabel}
+\membersection{wxTreeCtrl::Edit}\label{wxtreectrledit}
-\func{wxTextCtrl*}{EditLabel}{\param{long }{item}, \param{wxClassInfo*}{ textControlClass = CLASSINFO(wxTextCtrl)}}
+\func{wxTextCtrl\&}{Edit}{\param{long }{item}}
 Starts editing the label of the given item, returning the text control that the tree control uses for editing.
 Pass another {\it textControlClass} if a derived class is required. It usually will be, in order for
 the application to detect when editing has finished and to call \helpref{wxTreeCtrl::EndEditLabel}{wxtreectrlendeditlabel}.
 Do not delete the text control yourself.
 This function is currently supported under Windows only.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxTreeCtrl::EndEditLabel}{wxtreectrlendeditlabel}
 \membersection{wxTreeCtrl::EndEditLabel}\label{wxtreectrlendeditlabel}
 \func{bool}{EndEditLabel}{\param{bool }{cancelEdit}}
 Ends label editing. If {\it cancelEdit} is TRUE, the edit will be cancelled.
 This function is currently supported under Windows only.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxTreeCtrl::EditLabel}{wxtreectrleditlabel}
 \membersection{wxTreeCtrl::EnsureVisible}\label{wxtreectrlensurevisible}
 \func{bool}{EnsureVisible}{\param{long }{item}}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/tstring.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/tstring.tex
--- a/docs/latex/wx/ttoolbar.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/ttoolbar.tex
@@ -1,6 +1,7 @@
 \section{Toolbar overview}\label{wxtoolbaroverview}
-Classes: \helpref{wxToolBar}{wxtoolbar}
+Classes: \helpref{wxToolBarBase}{wxtoolbarbase}, \helpref{wxToolBarSimple}{wxtoolbarsimple},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxToolBarMSW}{wxtoolbarmsw}, \helpref{wxToolBar95}{wxtoolbar95}
 The toolbar family of classes allows an application to use toolbars
 in a variety of configurations and styles.
@@ -15,10 +16,21 @@ out the classes. This is because there are a number of different toolbar
 styles that you may wish to use simultaneously, and also, future
 toolbar implementations will emerge (for example, using the
 new-style Windows `coolbar' as seen in Microsoft applications) which
-cannot all be shoe-horned into the one class.
+cannot be shoe-horned into the one class.
-For each platform, the symbol {\bf wxToolBar} is defined to be one of the
+This does mean that if you wish to use a more sophisticated toolbar
-specific toolbar classes.
+on one platform (say, wxToolBar95) and a simple toolbar on another
 platform (wxToolBarSimple), then you will need some simple ifdefing, such as:
 \begin{verbatim}
  #ifdef wx_msw
  #  define wxToolBar wxToolBar95
  #else
  #  define wxToolBar wxToolBarSimple
  #endif
 \end{verbatim}
 Fortunately, the APIs of the toolbar classes are virtually identical.
 The following is a summary of the toolbar classes and their differences.
@@ -31,15 +43,15 @@ with the Windows look and feel. This toolbar can scroll, and you can have arbitr
 numbers of rows and columns.
 \item {\bf wxToolBarMSW.} This class implements an old-style Windows toolbar, only on
 Windows. There are small, three-dimensional buttons, which do not (currently) reflect
-the current Windows colour settings: the buttons are grey. This is the default wxToolBar
+the current Windows colour settings: the buttons are grey.
 on 16-bit windows.
 \item {\bf wxToolBar95.} Uses the native Windows 95 toolbar class. It dynamically adjusts its
 background and button colours according to user colour settings.
 CreateTools must be called after the tools have been added.
 No absolute positioning is supported but you can specify the number
-of rows, and add tool separators with {\bf AddSeparator}.
+of rows, and add tool separators with {\bf AddSeparator}. {\bf Layout} does nothing.
-Tooltips are supported. {\bf OnRightClick} is not supported. This is the default wxToolBar
+Tooltips are supported. {\bf OnRightClick} is not supported.
-on Windows 95, Windows NT 4 and above.
+For some reason, a wxToolBar95 control cannot be moved to any
 position other than the top-left of the frame.
 \end{itemize}
 A toolbar might appear as a single row of images under
@@ -56,229 +68,61 @@ around the bitmap (for colour displays where inverting will not have
 the desired result).
 The Windows-specific toolbar classes expect 16-colour bitmaps that are 16 pixels wide and 15 pixels
-high. If you want to use a different size, call {\bf SetToolBitmapSize}\rtfsp
+high. If you want to use a different size, call {\bf SetDefaultSize}\rtfsp
 as the demo shows, before adding tools to the button bar. Don't supply more than
 one bitmap for each tool, because the toolbar generates all three images (normal,
 depressed and checked) from the single bitmap you give it.
-To intercept
+Mouse click events for a given button are sent to a member called
 \rtfsp{\bf OnLeftClick}, and so an application must derive from wxToolBar in order
 to use it. The application can also handle {\bf OnMouseEnter} events for
 the tools, to give the user extra feedback about the tools as the mouse
 moves over them.
 \subsection{Using the toolbar library}
-Include {\tt "wx/toolbar.h"}, or if using a class directly, one of:
+Include one of the files {\tt tbarsmpl.h, tbar95.h, tbarmsw.h}.
-\begin{itemize}\itemsep=0pt
+Example of toolbar use are given in the sample programs tbarsmpl,
-\item {\tt "wx/msw/tbarmsw.h} for wxToolBarMSW
+tbarmsw and tbar95.
 \item {\tt "wx/msw/tbar95.h} for wxToolBar95
 \item {\tt "wx/tbarsmpl.h} for wxToolBarSimple
 \end{itemize}
-Example of toolbar use are given in the sample program ``toolbar''. The
+Each sample creates a main window, and two toolbars: a floating toolbar
-source is given below.
+with 24 tools, and a toolbar along the top of the main drawing window, divided into groups.
 The test program defines a general-purpose derived frame called
 \rtfsp{\bf wxFrameWithToolBar} which can manage a frame with one main subwindow
 and one horizontal toolbar.
 Note that one of the bitmaps on the floating toolbar is a small version of the
 main graphic: this demonstrates how a memory device context can be used to
 draw into a bitmap. An application which allowed the user to build up a symbol
 library dynamically might create this kind of bitmap.
 Left clicks and movements over the toolbars are intercepted and information
 is displayed on the status line.
 The following fragment illustrates the essence of creating a toolbar.
 {\small
 \begin{verbatim}
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // Name:        test.cpp
 // Purpose:     wxToolBar sample
 // Author:      Julian Smart
 // Modified by:
 // Created:     04/01/98
 // RCS-ID:      $Id$
 // Copyright:   (c) Julian Smart
 // Licence:   	wxWindows licence
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // For compilers that support precompilation, includes "wx/wx.h".
 #include "wx/wxprec.h"
 #ifdef __BORLANDC__
 #pragma hdrstop
 #endif
 #ifndef WX_PRECOMP
 #include "wx/wx.h"
 #endif
 #include "wx/toolbar.h"
 #include "test.h"
 IMPLEMENT_APP(MyApp)
 #ifdef __X__
 // TODO: include XBM or XPM icons for X apps
 #endif
 // The `main program' equivalent, creating the windows and returning the
 // main frame
 bool MyApp::OnInit(void)
 {
  // Create the main frame window
  MyFrame* frame = new MyFrame(NULL, -1, "wxToolBar Sample",
     wxPoint(100, 100), wxSize(450, 300));
  // Give it a status line
  frame->CreateStatusBar();
  // Give it an icon
 #ifdef __WXMSW__
  frame->SetIcon(wxIcon("mondrian"));
 #endif
 #ifdef __X__
  frame->SetIcon(wxIcon("mondrian.xbm"));
 #endif
  // Make a menubar
  wxMenu *fileMenu = new wxMenu;
  fileMenu->Append(wxID_EXIT, "E&xit");
  wxMenu *helpMenu = new wxMenu;
  helpMenu->Append(wxID_HELP, "&About");
  wxMenuBar* menuBar = new wxMenuBar;
  menuBar->Append(fileMenu, "&File");
  menuBar->Append(helpMenu, "&Help");
  // Associate the menu bar with the frame
  frame->SetMenuBar(menuBar);
  // Create the toolbar
  frame->CreateToolBar(wxNO_BORDER|wxHORIZONTAL|wxTB_FLAT, ID_TOOLBAR);
  InitToolbar(frame->GetToolBar());
  // Force a resize. This should probably be replaced by a call to a wxFrame
  // function that lays out default decorations and the remaining content window.
  frame->OnSize(wxSizeEvent(wxSize(-1, -1), frame->GetId()));
  frame->Show(TRUE);
  frame->SetStatusText("Hello, wxWindows");
  SetTopWindow(frame);
  return TRUE;
 }
 bool MyApp::InitToolbar(wxToolBar* toolBar)
 {
  toolBar->SetMargins(5, 5);
  // Set up toolbar
  wxBitmap* toolBarBitmaps[8];
 #ifdef __WXMSW__
  toolBarBitmaps[0] = new wxBitmap("icon1");
  toolBarBitmaps[1] = new wxBitmap("icon2");
  toolBarBitmaps[2] = new wxBitmap("icon3");
-  toolBarBitmaps[3] = new wxBitmap("icon4");
+  ...
  toolBarBitmaps[4] = new wxBitmap("icon5");
  toolBarBitmaps[5] = new wxBitmap("icon6");
  toolBarBitmaps[6] = new wxBitmap("icon7");
  toolBarBitmaps[7] = new wxBitmap("icon8");
 #endif
 #ifdef __X__
  // TODO
  toolBarBitmaps[0] = new wxBitmap(...);
  toolBarBitmaps[1] = new wxBitmap(...);
  toolBarBitmaps[2] = new wxBitmap(...);
  toolBarBitmaps[3] = new wxBitmap(...);
  toolBarBitmaps[4] = new wxBitmap(...);
  toolBarBitmaps[5] = new wxBitmap(...);
  toolBarBitmaps[6] = new wxBitmap(...);
  toolBarBitmaps[7] = new wxBitmap(...);
 #endif
-#ifdef __WXMSW__
+  toolBarFrame = new wxFrame(NULL, "Tools", -1, wxPoint(0, 0), wxSize(300, 200),
-  int width = 24;
+    wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE | wxSTAY_ON_TOP);
 #else
  int width = 16;
 #endif
  int offX = 5;
  int currentX = 5;
-  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_NEW, *(toolBarBitmaps[0]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, (float)currentX, -1, NULL, "New file");
+  // 5 rows
-  currentX += width + 5;
+  toolBar = new TestToolBar(toolBarFrame, -1, wxPoint(10, 10), wxSize(-1, -1), 0, wxVERTICAL, 5);
-  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_OPEN, *(toolBarBitmaps[1]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, (float)currentX, -1, NULL, "Open file");
+  toolBar->SetMargins(2, 2);
  currentX += width + 5;
  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_SAVE, *(toolBarBitmaps[2]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, (float)currentX, -1, NULL, "Save file");
  currentX += width + 5;
  toolBar->AddSeparator();
  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_COPY, *(toolBarBitmaps[3]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, (float)currentX, -1, NULL, "Copy");
  currentX += width + 5;
  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_CUT, *(toolBarBitmaps[4]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, (float)currentX, -1, NULL, "Cut");
  currentX += width + 5;
  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_PASTE, *(toolBarBitmaps[5]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, (float)currentX, -1, NULL, "Paste");
  currentX += width + 5;
  toolBar->AddSeparator();
  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_PRINT, *(toolBarBitmaps[6]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, (float)currentX, -1, NULL, "Print");
  currentX += width + 5;
  toolBar->AddSeparator();
  toolBar->AddTool(wxID_HELP, *(toolBarBitmaps[7]), wxNullBitmap, FALSE, currentX, -1, NULL, "Help");
-  toolBar->Realize();
+  for (int i = 10; i < 25; i++)
    toolBar->AddTool(i, toolBarBitmaps[i], NULL, TRUE);
-  // Can delete the bitmaps since they're reference counted
+  toolBar->Layout();
-  int i;
+  float maxWidth, maxHeight;
-  for (i = 0; i < 8; i++)
+  wxSize size(toolBar->GetMaxSize());
-    delete toolBarBitmaps[i];
+  toolBarFrame->SetClientSize(maxSize.x, maxSize.y);
-
+  toolBarFrame->Show(TRUE);
  return TRUE;
 }
 // wxID_HELP will be processed for the 'About' menu and the toolbar help button.
 BEGIN_EVENT_TABLE(MyFrame, wxFrame)
    EVT_MENU(wxID_EXIT, MyFrame::OnQuit)
    EVT_MENU(wxID_HELP, MyFrame::OnAbout)
    EVT_CLOSE(MyFrame::OnCloseWindow)
    EVT_TOOL_RANGE(wxID_OPEN, wxID_PASTE, MyFrame::OnToolLeftClick)
    EVT_TOOL_ENTER(ID_TOOLBAR, MyFrame::OnToolEnter)
 END_EVENT_TABLE()
 // Define my frame constructor
 MyFrame::MyFrame(wxFrame* parent, wxWindowID id, const wxString& title, const wxPoint& pos,
        const wxSize& size, long style):
  wxFrame(parent, id, title, pos, size, style)
 {
  m_textWindow = new wxTextCtrl(this, -1, "", wxPoint(0, 0), wxSize(-1, -1), wxTE_MULTILINE);
 }
 void MyFrame::OnQuit(wxCommandEvent& event)
 {
    Close(TRUE);
 }
 void MyFrame::OnAbout(wxCommandEvent& event)
 {
    (void)wxMessageBox("wxWindows wxToolBar demo\n", "About wxToolBar");
 }
 // Define the behaviour for the frame closing
 // - must delete all frames except for the main one.
 void MyFrame::OnCloseWindow(wxCloseEvent& event)
 {
  Destroy();
 }
 void MyFrame::OnToolLeftClick(wxCommandEvent& event)
 {
  wxString str;
  str.Printf("Clicked on tool %d", event.GetId());
  SetStatusText(str);
 }
 void MyFrame::OnToolEnter(wxCommandEvent& event)
 {
  if (event.GetSelection() > -1)
  {
    wxString str;
    str.Printf("This is tool number %d", event.GetSelection());
    SetStatusText(str);
  }
  else
    SetStatusText("");
 }
 \end{verbatim}
 }
--- a/docs/latex/wx/window.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/window.tex
@@ -1585,8 +1585,10 @@ handling of pages and ranges.
 \wxheading{See also}
 \helpref{wxWindow::SetScrollPos}{wxwindowsetscrollpos},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::SetScrollRange}{wxwindowsetscrollpage},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPos}{wxwindowsetscrollpos},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPage}{wxwindowsetscrollpage},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollRange}{wxwindowsetscrollrange},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPage}{wxwindowsetscrollrange},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxScrollBar}{wxscrollbar}, \helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow}
 \end{comment}
@@ -1613,7 +1615,8 @@ application to take note of scrollbar attributes and redraw contents accordingly
 \helpref{wxWindow::SetScrollbar}{wxwindowsetscrollbar},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPos}{wxwindowsetscrollpos},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollThumb}{wxwindowgetscrollthumb},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollRange}{wxwindowsetscrollrange},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollThumb}{wxwindowsetscrollthumb},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxScrollBar}{wxscrollbar}, \helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow}
 \begin{comment}
@@ -1644,7 +1647,8 @@ and usually the scrollbar will be automatically hidden.
 \helpref{wxWindow::SetScrollPos}{wxwindowsetscrollpos},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::SetScrollPage}{wxwindowsetscrollpage},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPos}{wxwindowsetscrollpos},\rtfsp
-\helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPage}{wxwindowsetscrollpage},\rtfsp
+\helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollRange}{wxwindowsetscrollrange},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxWindow::GetScrollPage}{wxwindowsetscrollrange},\rtfsp
 \helpref{wxScrollBar}{wxscrollbar}, \helpref{wxScrolledWindow}{wxscrolledwindow}
 \end{comment}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/winhelp.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/winhelp.tex
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ just before the first call to display something.
 \wxheading{See also}
-\helpref{wxHelpControllerBase}{wxhelpcontrollerbase}
+\helpref{wxHelpControllerBase}{wxwinhelpcontrollerbase}
 \wxheading{Include file}
--- a/docs/latex/wx/wx.hpj
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/wx.hpj
@@ -1,9 +1,15 @@
 ; This file is maintained by HCW. Do not modify this file directly.
 [OPTIONS]
-COMPRESS=HIGH
+HCW=0
 COMPRESS=60 Hall Zeck
 LCID=0x809 0x0 0x0 ;English (United Kingdom)
 REPORT=Yes
 CONTENTS=Contents
 TITLE=wxWindows Manual
 BMROOT=..\..\..\..\wxwind~1\docs\latex\wx
 BMROOT=Assume that bitmaps are where the source is
 HLP=.\wx.hlp
 [FILES]
 wx.rtf
--- a/docs/latex/wx/wxstring.tex
+++ b/docs/latex/wx/wxstring.tex
@@ -1,525 +1,593 @@
 \section{\class{wxString}}\label{wxstring}
 \wxheading{Derived from}
 None
 \wxheading{See also}
 \overview{Overview}{wxstringoverview}
-\latexignore{\rtfignore{\wxheading{Members}}}
+\helpref{Member functions by category}{wxstringcategories}
 {\bf CAVE:} The description of the memberfunctions is very
 sparse in the moment. It will be extended in the next
 version of the help file. The list of memberfunctions
 is complete.
 \membersection{wxString::wxString}\label{wxstringconstruct}
-\func{}{wxString}{\void}
+\func{void}{wxString}{\param{void}{}}\\
 \func{void}{wxString}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}}\\
 \func{void}{wxString}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}}\\
 \func{void}{wxString}{\param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{void}{wxString}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ len}}\\
 \func{void}{wxString}{\param{char}{ c}}
-Default constructor.
+Constructors.
 \func{}{wxString}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}}
 Copy constructor.
 \func{}{wxString}{\param{char}{ ch}, \param{size\_t}{ n = 1}}
 Constructs a string of {\it n} copies of character {\it ch}.
 \func{}{wxString}{\param{const char*}{ psz}, \param{size\_t}{ nLength = STRING\_MAXLEN}}
 Takes first {\it nLength} characters from the C string {\it psz}.
 The default value of STRING\_MAXLEN means take all the string.
 \func{}{wxString}{\param{const unsigned char*}{ psz}, \param{size\_t}{ nLength = STRING\_MAXLEN}}
 For compilers using unsigned char: takes first {\it nLength} characters from the C string {\it psz}.
 The default value of STRING\_MAXLEN means take all the string.
 \func{}{wxString}{\param{const wchar\_t*}{ psz}}
 Constructs a string from the wide (UNICODE) string.
 \membersection{wxString::\destruct{wxString}}\label{wxstringdestruct}
-\func{}{\destruct{wxString}}{\void}
+\func{void}{\destruct{wxString}}{\void}
-String destructor. Note that this is not virtual, so wxString must not be inherited from.
+String destructor.
 \membersection{wxString::Alloc}\label{wxstringAlloc}
-\func{void}{Alloc}{\param{uint}{ newsize}}
+\func{void}{Alloc}{\param{int}{ newsize}}
-Preallocate some space for wxString. Only works if the data of this string is not shared.
+Preallocate some space for wxString.
 \membersection{wxString::Allocation}\label{wxstringAllocation}
 \func{int}{Allocation}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
 Report current allocation (not length!).
 \membersection{wxString::Append}\label{wxstringAppend}
-\func{wxString\&}{Append}{\param{const char*}{ psz}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Append}{\param{const char*}{ cs}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Append}{\param{const wxString\&}{ s}}
-Concatenates {\it psz} to this string, returning a reference to it.
+Concatenation.
-\func{wxString\&}{Append}{\param{char}{ ch}, \param{int}{ count = 1}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Append}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ rep = 1}}
-Concatenates character {\it ch} to this string, {\it count} times, returning a reference
+Append {\it c}, {\it rep} times
 to it.
 \membersection{wxString::After}\label{wxstringAfter}
-\constfunc{wxString}{After}{\param{char}{ ch}}
+\func{wxSubString}{After}{\param{int}{ pos}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{After}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{After}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{After}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{After}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{After}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}
-Gets all the characters after the first occurence of {\it ch}.
+\membersection{wxString::At}\label{wxstringAt}
-Returns the empty string if {\it ch} is not found.
+
 \func{wxSubString}{At}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{int}{ len}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{operator ()}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{int}{ len}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{At}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{At}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{At}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{At}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{At}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}
 wxSubString extraction.
 Note that you can't take a substring of a const wxString, since
 this leaves open the possiblility of indirectly modifying the
 wxString through the wxSubString.
 \membersection{wxString::Before}\label{wxstringBefore}
-\constfunc{wxString}{Before}{\param{char}{ ch}}
+\func{wxSubString}{Before}{\param{int}{ pos}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Before}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Before}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Before}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Before}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Before}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}
-Gets all characters before the last occurence of {\it ch}.
+\membersection{wxString::Capitalize}\label{wxstringCapitalize}
 Returns empty string if {\it ch} is not found.
-\membersection{wxString::Cmp}\label{wxstringcmp}
+\func{void}{Capitalize}{\param{void}{}}\\
 \func{friend wxString}{Capitalize}{\param{wxString\&}{ x}}
-\constfunc{int}{Cmp}{\param{const char*}{ psz}}
+\membersection{wxString::Cat}\label{wxstringCat}
-Case-sensitive comparison.
+\func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{char}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ a}, \param{char}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{char}{ b}, \param{wxString\&}{ c}}
-Returns 0 if equal, +1 if greater or -1 if less.
+Concatenate first two arguments, store the result in the last argument.
-See also CmpNoCase, IsSameAs.
+\func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{const char*}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{char}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{const char*}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{char}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{const wxString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{const char*}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const wxString\&}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{char}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}
-\membersection{wxString::CmpNoCase}\label{wxstringcmpnocase}
+\func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{const char*}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxString\&}{ b}, \param{char}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{const char*}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ b}, \param{char}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{const wxString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{const char*}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}\\
 \func{friend void}{Cat}{\param{const char*}{ a}, \param{const char*}{ b}, \param{char}{ c}, \param{wxString\&}{ d}}
-\constfunc{int}{CmpNoCase}{\param{const char*}{ psz}}
+Double concatenation, by request. (Yes, there are too many versions, 
 but if one is supported, then the others should be too).
 Concatenate the first 3 args, store the result in the last argument.
-Case-insensitive comparison.
+\membersection{wxString::Chars}\label{wxstringChars}
-Returns 0 if equal, +1 if greater or -1 if less.
+\func{const char*}{Chars}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-See also Cmp, IsSameAs.
+Conversion.
 \membersection{wxString::CompareTo}\label{wxstringCompareTo}
 \begin{verbatim}
 #define NO_POS ((int)(-1)) // undefined position
-enum caseCompare {exact, ignoreCase};
+enum CaseCompare {exact, ignoreCase};
 \end{verbatim}
-\constfunc{int}{CompareTo}{\param{const char*}{ psz}, \param{caseCompare}{ cmp = exact}}
+\func{int}{CompareTo}{\param{const char*}{ cs}, \param{CaseCompare}{ cmp = exact}} \param{ const}{}\\
-
+\func{int}{CompareTo}{\param{const wxString\&}{ cs}, \param{CaseCompare}{ cmp = exact}} \param{ const}{}
 Case-sensitive comparison. Returns 0 if equal, 1 if greater or -1 if less.
 \membersection{wxString::Contains}\label{wxstringContains}
-\func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxString\&}{ str}}
+\func{bool}{Contains}{\param{char}{ c}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const char*}{ t}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns 1 if target appears anyhere in wxString; else 0.
+Return 1 if target appears anyhere in wxString; else 0.
-\membersection{wxString::Empty}\label{wxstringempty}
+\func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const char*}{ pat}, \param{CaseCompare}{ cmp}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxString\&}{ pat}, \param{CaseCompare}{ cmp}} \param{ const}{}
-\func{void}{Empty}{\void}
+Case dependent/independent variation .
-Reinitializes the string and frees the data.
+\func{bool}{Contains}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ pos}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ pos}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ pos}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ pos}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Contains}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ pos}} \param{ const}{}
-\membersection{wxString::Find}\label{wxstringfind}
+Return 1 if the target appears anywhere after position {\it pos} (or
 before, if {\it pos} is negative) in wxString; else 0.
-\constfunc{int}{Find}{\param{char}{ ch}, \param{bool}{ fromEnd = FALSE}}
+\membersection{wxString::Copy}\label{wxstringCopy}
-Searches for the given character. Returns the starting index, or -1 if not found.
+\func{wxString}{Copy}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-\constfunc{int}{Find}{\param{const char*}{ sz}}
+Duplication.
-Searches for the given string. Returns the starting index, or -1 if not found.
+\membersection{wxString::Del}\label{wxstringDel}
-\membersection{wxString::First}\label{wxstringfirst}
+\func{wxString\&}{Del}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{int}{ len}}
-\func{size\_t}{First}{\param{char}{ c}}
+Delete {\it len} characters starting at {\it pos}.
-\constfunc{size\_t}{First}{\param{const char*}{ psz}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Del}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Del}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Del}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Del}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Del}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}
-\constfunc{size\_t}{First}{\param{const wxString\&}{ str}}
+Delete the first occurrence of target after {\it startpos}.
-\constfunc{size\_t}{First}{\param{const char}{ ch}}
+\membersection{wxString::DownCase}\label{wxstringDownCase}
-Returns the first occurrence of the item.
+\func{void}{Downcase}{\param{void}{}}\\
 \func{friend wxString}{Downcase}{\param{wxString\&}{ x}}
-\membersection{wxString::GetChar}\label{wxstringgetchar}
+\membersection{wxString::Elem}\label{wxstringElem}
-\constfunc{char}{GetChar}{\param{size\_t}{ n}}
+\func{char}{Elem}{\param{int}{ i}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns the character at position {\it n} (read-only).
+Element extraction.
 \membersection{wxString::Empty}\label{wxstringEmpty}
 \func{int}{Empty}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
 \membersection{wxString::Error}\label{wxstringError}
 \func{void}{Error}{\param{const char*}{ msg}} \param{ const}{}
 \membersection{wxString::First}\label{wxstringFirst}
 \func{int}{First}{\param{char}{ c}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{First}{\param{const char*}{ cs}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{First}{\param{const wxString\&}{ cs}} \param{ const}{}
 Return first or last occurrence of item.
 \membersection{wxString::Firstchar}\label{wxstringFirstchar}
 \func{char}{Firstchar}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
 Element extraction.
 \membersection{wxString::Freq}\label{wxstringFreq}
 \func{int}{Freq}{\param{char}{ c}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Freq}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Freq}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Freq}{\param{const char*}{ t}} \param{ const}{}
 Return number of occurrences of target in wxString.
 \membersection{wxString::From}\label{wxstringFrom}
 \func{wxSubString}{From}{\param{int}{ pos}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{From}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{From}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{From}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{From}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{From}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}
 \membersection{wxString::GetData}\label{wxstringGetData}
-\constfunc{const char*}{GetData}{\void}
+\func{char*}{GetData}{\param{void}{}}
-wxWindows compatibility conversion. Returns a constant pointer to the data in the string.
+wxWindows compatibility conversion.
-\membersection{wxString::GetWritableChar}\label{wxstringgetwritablechar}
+\membersection{wxString::GSub}\label{wxstringGSub}
 \func{int}{GSub}{\param{const wxString\&}{ pat}, \param{const wxString\&}{ repl}}\\
 \func{int}{GSub}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ pat}, \param{const wxString\&}{ repl}}\\
 \func{int}{GSub}{\param{const char*}{ pat}, \param{const wxString\&}{ repl}}\\
 \func{int}{GSub}{\param{const char*}{ pat}, \param{const char*}{ repl}}\\
 \func{int}{GSub}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ pat}, \param{const wxString\&}{ repl}}
-\func{char\&}{GetWritableChar}{\param{size\_t}{ n}}
+Global substitution: substitute all occurrences of {\it pat} with {\it repl},
-
+returning the number of matches.
 Returns a reference to the character at position {\it n}.
 \membersection{wxString::GetWriteBuf}\label{wxstringgetwritebuf}
 \func{char*}{GetWriteBuf}{\param{uint}{ len}}
 Returns a writable buffer of at least {\it len} bytes.
 Call \helpref{wxString::UngetWriteBuf}{wxstringungetwritebuf} as soon as possible
 to put the string back into a reasonable state.
 \membersection{wxString::Index}\label{wxstringIndex}
-\constfunc{size\_t}{Index}{\param{char}{ ch}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}
+\func{int}{Index}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Index}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Index}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ startpos}, \param{CaseCompare}{ cmp}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Index}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Index}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Index}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos}, \param{CaseCompare}{ cmp}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Index}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}} \param{ const}{}
-Same as \helpref{wxString::Find}{wxstringfind}.
+Return the position of target in string, or -1 for failure.
 \constfunc{size\_t}{Index}{\param{const char*}{ sz}}
 Same as \helpref{wxString::Find}{wxstringfind}.
 \constfunc{size\_t}{Index}{\param{const char*}{ sz}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = TRUE}, \param{bool}{ fromEnd = FALSE}}
 Search the element in the array, starting from either side.
 If {\it fromEnd} is TRUE, reverse search direction.
 If {\bf caseSensitive}, comparison is case sensitive (the default).
 Returns the index of the first item matched, or NOT\_FOUND.
 \membersection{wxString::Insert}\label{wxstringInsert}
-\func{void}{Insert}{\param{const wxString\&}{ str}, \param{uint}{ index}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Insert}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{const char*}{ s}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Insert}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{const wxString\&}{ s}}
-Add new element at the given position.
+Insertion.
 \membersection{wxString::IsAscii}\label{wxstringIsAscii}
-\constfunc{bool}{IsAscii}{\void}
+\func{int}{IsAscii}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns TRUE if the string is ASCII.
+Classification (should be capital, because of ctype.h macros).
-\membersection{wxString::IsEmpty}\label{wxstringisempty}
+\membersection{wxString::IsDefined}\label{wxstringIsDefined}
-\constfunc{bool}{IsEmpty}{\void}
+\func{int}{IsDefined}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns TRUE if the string is NULL.
+Classification (should be capital, because of ctype.h macros).
 \membersection{wxString::IsNull}\label{wxstringIsNull}
-\constfunc{bool}{IsNull}{\void}
+\func{int}{IsNull}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns TRUE if the string is NULL (same as IsEmpty).
+Classification (should be capital, because of ctype.h macros).
 \membersection{wxString::IsNumber}\label{wxstringIsNumber}
-\constfunc{bool}{IsNumber}{\void}
+\func{int}{IsNumber}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns TRUE if the string is a number.
+Classification (should be capital, because of ctype.h macros).
 \membersection{wxString::IsSameAs}\label{wxstringissameas}
 \constfunc{bool}{IsSameAs}{\param{const char*}{ psz}, \param{bool}{ caseSensitive = TRUE}}
 Test for string equality, case-sensitive (default) or not.
 caseSensitive is TRUE by default (case matters).
 Returns TRUE if strings are equal, FALSE otherwise.
 See also Cmp, CmpNoCase.
 \membersection{wxString::IsWord}\label{wxstringIsWord}
-\constfunc{bool}{IsWord}{\void}
+\func{int}{IsWord}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns TRUE if the string is a word. TODO: what's the definition of a word?
+Classification (should be capital, because of ctype.h macros).
 \membersection{wxString::Last}\label{wxstringLast}
-\constfunc{char}{Last}{\void}
+\func{int}{Last}{\param{char}{ c}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Last}{\param{const char*}{ cs}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{int}{Last}{\param{const wxString\&}{ cs}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns the last character.
+First or last occurrence of item.
-\func{char\&}{Last}{\void}
+\membersection{wxString::Lastchar}\label{wxstringLastchar}
-Returns a reference to the last character (writable).
+\func{char}{Lastchar}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
-\membersection{wxString::Left}\label{wxstringleft}
+Element extraction.
-\constfunc{wxString}{Left}{\param{size\_t}{ count}}
+\membersection{wxString::Length}\label{wxstringLength}
-Returns the first {\it count} characters.
+\func{unsigned int}{Length}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
 \constfunc{wxString}{Left}{\param{char}{ ch}}
 Returns all characters before the first occurence of {\it ch}.
 Returns the whole string if {\it ch} is not found.
 \membersection{wxString::Len}\label{wxstringlen}
 \constfunc{size\_t}{Len}{\void}
 Returns the length of the string.
 \membersection{wxString::Length}\label{wxstringlength}
 \constfunc{size\_t}{Length}{\void}
 Returns the length of the string (same as Len).
 \membersection{wxString::LowerCase}\label{wxstringLowerCase}
-\func{void}{LowerCase}{\void}
+\func{void}{LowerCase}{\param{void}{}}
 Same as MakeLower.
 \membersection{wxString::MakeLower}\label{wxstringmakelower}
 \func{void}{MakeLower}{\void}
 Converts all characters to lower case.
 \membersection{wxString::MakeUpper}\label{wxstringmakeupper}
 \func{void}{MakeUpper}{\void}
 Converts all characters to upper case.
 \membersection{wxString::Matches}\label{wxstringMatches}
-\constfunc{bool}{Matches}{\param{const char*}{ szMask}}
+\func{bool}{Matches}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ pos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Matches}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ pos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Matches}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ pos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Matches}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ pos = 0}} \param{ const}{}\\
 \func{bool}{Matches}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ pos = 0}} \param{ const}{}
-Returns TRUE if the string contents matches a mask containing '*' and '?'.
+Return 1 if target appears at position {\it pos} in wxString; else 0.
-\membersection{wxString::Mid}\label{wxstringmid}
+\membersection{wxString::OK}\label{wxstringOK}
-\constfunc{wxString}{Mid}{\param{size\_t}{ first}, \param{size\_t}{ count = STRING\_MAXLEN}}
+\func{int}{OK}{\param{void}{}} \param{ const}{}
 Returns a substring starting at {\it first}, with length {\it count}, or the rest of
 the string if {\it count} is the default value.
 \membersection{wxString::Pad}\label{wxstringpad}
 \func{wxString\&}{Pad}{\param{size\_t}{ count}, \param{char}{ pad = ' '}, \param{bool}{ fromRight = TRUE}}
 Adds {\it count} copies of {\it pad} to the beginning, or to the end of the string (the default).
 Removes spaces from the left or from the right (default).
 \membersection{wxString::Prepend}\label{wxstringPrepend}
-\func{wxString\&}{Prepend}{\param{const wxString\&}{ str}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Prepend}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Prepend}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Prepend}{\param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Prepend}{\param{char}{ c}}
-Prepends {\it str} to this string, returning a reference to this string.
+Prepend.
-\membersection{wxString::Printf}\label{wxstringprintf}
+\func{wxString\&}{Prepend}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ rep=1}}
-\func{int}{Printf}{\param{const char* }{pszFormat}, \param{}{...}}
+Prepend {\it c}, {\it rep} times.
 \membersection{wxString::Readline}\label{wxstringReadline}
-Similar to sprintf. Returns the number of characters written, or an integer less than zero
+\func{friend int}{Readline}{\param{istream\&}{ s}, \param{wxString\&}{ x}, 
-on error.
+ \param{char}{ terminator = '$\backslash$n'}, 
-
+ \param{int}{ discard\_terminator = 1}}\\
-\membersection{wxString::PrintfV}\label{wxstringprintfv}
+\func{friend int}{Readline}{\param{FILE *}{ f}, \param{wxString\&}{ x}, 
-
+ \param{char}{ terminator = '$\backslash$n'}, 
-\func{int}{PrintfV}{\param{const char* }{pszFormat}, \param{va\_list}{ argPtr}}
+ \param{int}{ discard\_terminator = 1}}
 Similar to vprintf. Returns the number of characters written, or an integer less than zero
 on error.
 \membersection{wxString::Remove}\label{wxstringRemove}
-\func{wxString\&}{Remove}{\param{size\_t}{ pos}}
+\func{wxString\&}{RemoveLast}{\param{void}{}}\\ 
 \func{wxString\&}{Remove}{\param{int}{ pos}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Remove}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{int}{ len}}
-Same as Truncate. Removes the portion from {\it pos} to the end of the string.
+Remove {\it pos} to end of string.
 \func{wxString\&}{Remove}{\param{size\_t}{ pos}, \param{size\_t}{ len}}
 Removes the last {\it len} characters from the string, starting at {\it pos}.
 \membersection{wxString::RemoveLast}\label{wxstringremovelast}
 \func{wxString\&}{RemoveLast}{\void}
 Removes the last character.
 \membersection{wxString::Replace}\label{wxstringReplace}
-\func{uint}{Replace}{\param{const char*}{ szOld}, \param{const char*}{ szNew}, \param{bool}{ replaceAll}}
+\func{wxString\&}{Replace}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{int}{ n}, \param{const char*}{ s}}\\
 \func{wxString\&}{Replace}{\param{int}{ pos}, \param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\&}{ s}}
-Replace first (or all) occurences of substring with another one.
+\membersection{wxString::Replicate}\label{wxstringReplicate}
-{\it replaceAll}: global replace (default), or only the first occurence.
+\func{friend wxString}{Replicate}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ n}}\\
 \func{friend wxString}{Replicate}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}, \param{int}{ n}}
-Returns the number of replacements made.
+Replication.
-\membersection{wxString::Right}\label{wxstringright}
+\membersection{wxString::Reverse}\label{wxstringReverse}
-\constfunc{wxString}{Right}{\param{size\_t}{ count}}
+\func{void}{Reverse}{\param{void}{}}\\
-
+\func{friend wxString}{Reverse}{\param{wxString\&}{ x}}
 Returns the last {\it count} characters.
 \constfunc{wxString}{Right}{\param{char}{ ch}}
 Returns all characters after the last occurence of {\it ch}.
 Returns the whole string if {\it ch} is not found.
 \membersection{wxString::SetChar}\label{wxstringsetchar}
 \func{void}{SetChar}{\param{size\_t}{ n}, \param{char}{ch}}
 Sets the character at position {\it n}.
 \membersection{wxString::Shrink}\label{wxstringshrink}
 \func{void}{Shrink}{\void}
 Minimizes the string's memory. Only works if the data of this string is not shared.
 \membersection{wxString::sprintf}\label{wxstringsprintf}
 \func{void}{sprintf}{\param{const wxString\& }{ fmt}}
-\func{void}{sprintf}{\param{const char* }{ fmt}}
+Formatted assignment. We do not use the 'sprintf' constructor anymore,
 because with that constructor, every initialisation with a string would
 go through sprintf and this is not desirable, because sprintf
 interprets some characters. With the above function we can write:
-The same as Printf.
+\begin{verbatim}
 wxString msg; msg.sprintf("Processing item %d\n", count);
 \end{verbatim}
 \membersection{wxString::Strip}\label{wxstringStrip}
 \begin{verbatim}
-enum stripType {leading = 0x1, trailing = 0x2, both = 0x3};
+enumStripType {leading = 0x1, trailing = 0x2, both = 0x3};
 \end{verbatim}
-\constfunc{wxString}{Strip}{\param{stripType}{ s = trailing}}
+\func{wxSubString}{Strip}{\param{StripType}{ s = trailing}, \param{char}{ c = ' '}}
-Strip characters at the front and/or end. The same as Trim except that it
+Strip characterss at the front and/or end.
-doesn't change this string.
+StripType is defined for bitwise ORing.
-\membersection{wxString::Trim}\label{wxstringtrim}
+\membersection{wxString::SubString}\label{wxstringSubString}
-\func{wxString\&}{Trim}{\param{bool}{ fromRight = TRUE}}
+\func{wxString}{SubString}{\param{int}{ from}, \param{int}{ to}}
-Removes spaces from the left or from the right (default).
+Edward Zimmermann's additions.
-\membersection{wxString::Truncate}\label{wxstringtruncate}
+\membersection{wxString::Through}\label{wxstringThrough}
-\func{wxString\&}{Truncate}{\param{size\_t}{ len}}
+\func{wxSubString}{Through}{\param{int}{ pos}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Through}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Through}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Through}{\param{const char*}{ t}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Through}{\param{char}{ c}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \func{wxSubString}{Through}{\param{const wxRegex\&}{ r}, \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}
-Truncate the string to the given length.
+\membersection{wxString::Upcase}\label{wxstringUpcase}
-\membersection{wxString::UngetWriteBuf}\label{wxstringungetwritebuf}
+\func{void}{Upcase}{\param{void}{}}\\
-
+\func{friend wxString}{Upcase}{\param{wxString\&}{ x}}
 \func{void}{UngetWriteBuf}{\void}
 Puts the string back into a reasonable state, after
 \rtfsp\helpref{wxString::GetWriteBuf}{wxstringgetwritebuf} was called.
 \membersection{wxString::UpperCase}\label{wxstringUpperCase}
-\func{void}{UpperCase}{\void}
+\func{void}{UpperCase}{\param{void}{}}\\
 The same as MakeUpper.
 \membersection{wxString::operator $=$}\label{wxstringoperatorassign}
-\func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ str}}
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
-
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{const char*}{ y}}\\
-\func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{const char*}{ psz}}
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{char}{ c}}\\
-
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}
 \func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{char}{ c}}
 \func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{const unsigned char*}{ psz}}
 \func{wxString\&}{operator $=$}{\param{const wchar\_t*}{ pwz}}
 Assignment.
-
+ 
 \membersection{operator wxString::$+$}\label{wxstringoperatorplus}
 Concatenation.
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ y}}
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{char}{ y}}
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const char*}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
 \membersection{wxString::operator $+=$}\label{wxstringPlusEqual}
-\func{void}{operator $+=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ str}}
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $+=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
-
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $+=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
-\func{void}{operator $+=$}{\param{const char*}{ psz}}
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $+=$}{\param{const char*}{ t}}\\
-
+\func{wxString\&}{operator $+=$}{\param{char}{ c}}
 \func{void}{operator $+=$}{\param{char}{ c}}
 Concatenation.
 \membersection{wxString::operator []}\label{wxstringoperatorbracket}
-\func{char\&}{operator []}{\param{size\_t}{ i}}
+\func{char\&}{operator []}{\param{int}{ i}}
 \func{char}{operator []}{\param{size\_t}{ i}}
 \func{char}{operator []}{\param{int}{ i}}
 Element extraction.
 \membersection{wxString::operator ()}\label{wxstringoperatorparenth}
-\func{wxString}{operator ()}{\param{size\_t}{ start}, \param{size\_t}{ len}}
+\func{char\&}{operator ()}{\param{int}{ i}}
 Same as Mid (substring extraction).
 \membersection{wxString::operator \cinsert}\label{wxstringoperatorout}
-
+\func{friend ostream\&}{operator \cinsert}{\param{ostream\&}{ s}, \param{const wxString\&}{ x}}\\
-\func{wxString\&}{operator \cinsert}{\\param{const wxString\&}{ str}}
+\func{friend ostream\&}{operator \cinsert}{\param{ostream\&}{ s}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}}
 \func{wxString\&}{operator \cinsert}{\\param{const char*}{ psz}}
 \func{wxString\&}{operator \cinsert}{\\param{char }{ch}}
 Same as $+=$.
 \membersection{wxString::operator \cextract}\label{wxstringoperatorin}
-
+\func{friend istream\&}{operator \cextract}{\param{istream\&}{ s}, \param{wxString\&}{ x}}
 \func{friend istream\&}{operator \cextract}{\param{istream\&}{ is}, \param{wxString\&}{ str}}
 Extraction from a stream.
 \membersection{wxString::operator const char*}\label{wxstringoperatorconstcharpt}
 \constfunc{}{operator const char*}{\param{void}{}}
-\constfunc{}{operator const char*}{\void}
+Conversion.
-Implicit conversion to a C string.
+\membersection{wxCHARARG}\label{wxstringwxCHARARG}
 \begin{verbatim}
 #define wxCHARARG(s) ((const wxString\& )(s).Chars())  
 \end{verbatim}
 Here is a very, very, very ugly macro, but it makes things more
 transparent in cases, where a library function requires a 
 (const wxString\& ) argument. This is especially the case in wxWindows,
 where all char-arguments are (const wxString\& ) and not (const char* ).
 This macro should only be used in such cases and NOT to
 modify the internal data.
 The conventional way would be 'function((char*)string.Chars())'.
 With the wxCHARARG macro, this can be achieved by 'function(wxCHARARG(string))'.
 This makes it clearer that the usage should be confined
 to arguments.
 \membersection{CommonPrefix}\label{wxstringCommonPrefix}
 \func{friend wxString}{CommonPrefix}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y},\\
 \param{int}{ startpos = 0}}\\
 \membersection{CommonSuffix}\label{wxstringCommonSuffix}
 \func{friend wxString}{CommonSuffix}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y},\\
 \param{int}{ startpos = -1}}
 \membersection{Compare}\label{wxstringCompare}
 \func{int}{Compare}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{Compare}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{Compare}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{Compare}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{Compare}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{Compare}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ y}}
 Case dependent comparison. Returns 0 if the match succeeded.
 \membersection{FCompare}\label{wxstringFCompare}
 \func{int}{FCompare}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
 Case independent comparison. Returns 0 if the match succeeded.
 \membersection{Comparison operators}\label{wxstringComparison}
-\func{bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
+\func{int}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\ 
 \func{int}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}\\
 \func{int}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}
-\func{bool}{operator $==$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}
+\membersection{operator $+$}\label{wxstringoperatorplus}
-\func{bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
+\func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{char}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const wxSubString\&}{ x}, \param{char}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const char*}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}\\
 \func{wxString}{operator $+$}{\param{const char*}{ x}, \param{const wxSubString\&}{ y}}
-\func{bool}{operator $!=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}
+\membersection{Join}\label{wxstringJoin}
-\func{bool}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
+\func{friend wxString}{Join}{\param{wxString}{ src[]}, \param{int}{ n}, \param{const wxString\&}{ sep}}
-\func{bool}{operator $>$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}
+\membersection{Split}\label{wxstringSplit}
-\func{bool}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
+\func{friend int}{Split}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{wxString}{ res[]}, \param{int}{ maxn},\\
 \param{const wxString\&}{ sep}}\\
 \func{friend int}{Split}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{wxString}{ res[]}, \param{int}{ maxn},\\
 \param{const wxRegex\&}{ sep}}\\
 Split string into array res at separators; return number of elements
 \func{bool}{operator $>=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}
 \func{bool}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
 \func{bool}{operator $<$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}
 \func{bool}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const wxString\&}{ y}}
 \func{bool}{operator $<=$}{\param{const wxString\&}{ x}, \param{const char*}{ t}}
 \wxheading{Remarks}
 These comparisons are case-sensitive.
--- a/docs/licence.txt
+++ b/docs/licence.txt
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ This licence is intended to protect wxWindows, its developers,
 and its users, so that the considerable investment it represents
 is not abused.
-Unlike the L-GPL licence, you as a user are not obliged to
+Unlike the wxWindows licence, you as a user are not obliged to
 distribute wxWindows source code with your products. However,
 you are prevented from selling the code without permission from
 the authors, or denying others the rights to use or distribute
--- a/docs/msw/changes.txt
+++ b/docs/msw/changes.txt
@@ -2,19 +2,6 @@
 wxWindows 2.0 for Windows Change Log
 ------------------------------------
 Alpha 14, July 31st 1998
 ------------------------
 - Toolbar API has been simplified, and now
  wxFrame::GetClientArea returns the available client
  area when toolbar, status bar etc. have been accounted for.
  wxFrame::CreateToolBar added in line with CreateStatusBar.
 - Documentation updates, incl. for wxToolBar.
 - New wxAcceleratorTable class plus wxFrame::SetAcceleratorTable.
 - Various additions from other folk, e.g. streams, wxConfig
  changes, wxNotebook.
 - Added wxDocMDIParentFrame, wxDocMDIChildFrame for doc/view.
 Alpha 13, July 8th 1998
 -----------------------
--- a/docs/msw/todo.txt
+++ b/docs/msw/todo.txt
@@ -5,6 +5,8 @@ Todo on wxWin 2.0, Windows platform
 HIGH PRIORITY
 -------------
 Integrate Robert's wxGrid enhancements.
 Find/add wxThread sample - Arthur T-D?
 wxControl dimensions should be optionally based on dialog font
@@ -12,12 +14,15 @@ size for portability (dialog units as per Windows).
 Implement wxDC floating point transformations.
 Remove transformation from device to logical coordinates from
 events e.g. mouse events.
 Add wxDC::DeviceToLogical -> wxPoint etc (convenience accessors).
 Revamp Dialog Editor for new controls and properties (e.g.
 window id).
-Tidy wxConfig API.
+Registry classes (check out wxConfig class - see issues.txt).
 Change DnD classes to use global symbols, and wxString.
@@ -42,20 +47,18 @@ Update manual.
    wxListBox changes (for ownerdraw functionality)
    wxThread            DONE (except for topic overview)
    wxHelpController classes DONE (except for Unix ones)
-    wxString            PARTLY DONE
+    wxString
    wxTString
    Drag and drop (change API if required, e.g. const).
    wxCheckListBox
    wxAcceleratorTable
    wxBaseArray, other arrays
    (wxOwnerDrawn)
    Document the include file for each class
    Macros, e.g. wxASSERT
    Stream classes
    Functions
 Write tutorial.
-A wxDC function (or two) for drawing 3D edges.
+Other static classes.
 Makefiles for other compilers. Generic makefiles?
 Rewrite makefiles to maintain simultaneous debug/release
@@ -65,15 +68,31 @@ More wxSystemSettings (see comment in settings.cpp).
 wxSocket integration.
-Convert remaining utilities e.g. (GLCanvas; wxGraphLayout) and samples
+wxListCtrl, wxTreeCtrl, wxImageList integration with Robert
 Roebling's classes.
 Convert OGL, other utilities and samples.
 Check TODO entries.
 Change #include "wx/xxx.h" to #include <wx/xxx.h>
 Tidy code further, e.g. formatting from DevStudio, plus
 standard header.
 Shell function to invoke a document with open, print, whatever...
 wxTextCtrl (and wxMultiText/wxTextWindow in wxWin 1.xx) - differences between Edit
 and RichEdit controls.
 Make use of Vadim's gettext implementation throughout wxWin code.
 Document it.
 Change wxUpdateIterator to use wxRegion; or scrap
 wxUpdateIterator? See wxGTK.
 Check WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY mode, remove any unnecessary #ifdefs.
 Retain callback functions; have semi-compatible callback function prototypes
 for all controls, at least in WXWIN_COMPATIBLE mode, but
 retain (Set)Callback for all compilations. This is following a
@@ -81,13 +100,18 @@ panicky response to losing callbacks.
 Merge dib.cpp, dibutils.cpp.
 Simplify the toolbar samples.
 Add a wxTabCtrl sample.
-Improve printing. More API functions for printer DCs (to get
+EVT_ENTER/LEAVE_WINDOW: Perhaps one approach to reliable implementation of
-printer characteristics) and more reliable printing framework.
+EVT_LEAVE_WINDOW is to set a flag when the mouse pointer is in a window,
-
+then in idle time, check this window.
-Add GetIcon, GetBitmap to wxImageList. Perhaps store bitmaps
+If the flag is set but the mouse pointer is outside the window, then
-in image list so we can get them later.
+it's time to generate an EVT_LEAVE_WINDOW. This would be necessary at
 least for the case when the mouse cursor goes off the application windows,
 and no motion event was generated (i.e. you moved the mouse quickly!).
 If it goes from one app window to another, you could generate the event sooner.
 LOW PRIORITY
 ------------
@@ -108,8 +132,12 @@ BS_BITMAP, SS_BITMAP - but this may not allow wxBitmap
 argument, so instead just allow controls loaded from native
 resource to deal with this style and call default processing.
 Completion of drag and drop support (Vadim).
 Better clipboard support.
 Toolbars: use event tables not virtual functions.
 wxWizard class?
 Doc/view - have some standard views/docs e.g. wxTextView.
@@ -125,6 +153,10 @@ Integrate existing multimedia classes.
 Rich text class?
 Optimize size further.
 wxThread integration.
 Look at WinCE stuff incl. database classes.
 Improve conversion guide, compatibility classes, tools?
--- a/docs/symbols.txt
+++ b/docs/symbols.txt
@@ -4,22 +4,17 @@ GUIs:
 -----
 __X__           any X, but not GTK
-__WXMOTIF__     Motif
+__MOTIF__       Motif
-__WXXT__        Xt; mutually exclusive with WX_MOTIF (?)
+__XT__          Xt; mutually exclusive with WX_MOTIF (?)
-__WXGTK__       GTK
+__GTK__         GTK
-__WXMSW__       Any Windows
+__XVIEW__       Obsolete!
-__WXMAC__       MacOS
+__WINDOWS__     Any Windows
 __MAC__         MacOS
 __UNIX__        any Unix
 __WINDOWS__     any Windows
 __WIN95__       GUI for Windows 95 and above; NT 4.0 and above.
 __WIN32__       WIN32 API
 __NT__          Windows NT
-__WXCURSES__    CURSES
+__CURSES__      CURSES
 __WXSTUBS__     Stubbed version ('template' wxWin implementation)
 In fact, they should better all start with __WX instead of __ only. 
 The only GUIs implemented for 2.0 are __WXGTK__, __WXMSW__ and __WXMOTIF__
 yet. Any new ones, please start the define with __WX.
 OSes/machines:
@@ -56,6 +51,6 @@ __XLC__         ?? compiler
 wxWindows modes:
 ----------------
-__WXDEBUG__       usage: #ifdef __DEBUG__ (=> debug mode, else => release)
+__DEBUG__       usage: #ifdef __DEBUG__ (=> debug mode, else => release)
 WXDEBUG         usage: #if DEBUG (0: release, 1: minimal debug code, ...)
--- a/docs/word/odbc.doc
+++ b/docs/word/odbc.doc
--- a/docs/wxQt.html
+++ b/docs/wxQt.html
@@ -1,70 +0,0 @@
      $Id$
    <br>
    <H1>Proposal for a port of wxWindows to Qt - wxQt</H1>
    <p>
      Following the recent discussions
      and flamewars about KDE vs Gnome, we got worried that we'll see a
      repetition of the same damaging infighting from which Unix has
      suffered before. Competition is a good thing, but the current
      situation leaves application developers with a difficult decision to
      make: Write for KDE, using qt/harmony or write for Gnome, using GTK?
      Whatever happens to these projects, we will end up with a lot of
      duplicated efforts and a mix of applications written for either of the
      two environments. The result will not be the consistent look and feel
      that both projects aim for.
    <p>
      The people on the wxWindows developers team thought that we might have
      a solution for this problem, if we can get some outside help to get it
      done. Let us explain: wxWindows is a cross-platform development
      toolkit, a library of C++ classes which provide GUI concepts as well
      as other cross-platform issues such as container classes, debug
      features or configuration management. It has been around since 1992
      and started by supporting Motif, XView and MS-Windows, with a direct
      X11/Xt port added later. Last year, a major rewrite was started and we
      now have a much advanced library, available for MS Windows, with a
      Motif port under construction. Later last year, Robert Roebling set
      out on a one-man project to build wxGTK, a gtk-based implementation of
      wxWindows which in less than a year has become sufficiently stable to
      use it as the main development platform of rather large
      applications. The wxWindows license is a variant of the LGPL,
      which should meet no objections from the free software community. In
      fact, this has been an open source project long before the term became
      commonly used.
    <p>
      Our idea is, that if this is good enough to work across different
      operating systems (a MacOS port is under construction, too), it could
      easily bridge the gap between KDE and Gnome. The quick evolution of
      wxGTK has shown that a new port based on an existing widget set or
      toolkit can easily be created by a small team within a few
      months. Therefore, we would like to start a project for a Qt/Harmony
      based wxWindow library, wxQt. It would then be possible for
      application developers to write the same source and compile it either
      for KDE, Gnome or even any of the other supported systems.
    <p>
      But for this we need help. The core developers are all pretty busy on
      the existing ports, but we could provide significant help and support
      for any such effort. A wxQt port could also recycle lots of existing
      code from the other ports.
      Please, join us in this effort and, if you feel that you could
      contribute, join the wxWindows developers mailing list for further
      discussions. Just send a mail containing "<tt>subscribe</tt>" to
    <tt>wxwin-developers-request@wx.dent.med.uni-muenchen.de</tt>
    <p>
      You can find some more information about wxWindows at the following places:
 <ul>
 <li>The <a href="http://web.ukonline.co.uk/julian.smart/wxwin/">wxWindows homepage</a>.
 <li>The <a href="http://www.freiburg.linux.de/~wxxt/">wxGTK homepage</a>
 <li>The <a
 	  href="http://Ballueder.home.ml.org/wxWindows/wxQt.html">wxQt
 	  proposal</a>(this text)
 <li>The <a href="http://Ballueder.home.ml.org/M/">home of <em>M</em></a>, an email client developed using wxGTK, showing several <a href="http://Ballueder.home.ml.org/M/screenshots/">screenshots</a> of how it actually looks like.
 </ul>
 <p>
    <hr>
    Karsten Ballueder <tt><a
 	href="mailto:Ballueder@usa.net">Ballueder@usa.net</a> <a
    href="http://Ballueder.home.ml.org/">http://Ballueder.home.ml.org/</a></tt>
--- a/include/wx/accel.h
+++ b/include/wx/accel.h
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
 #ifndef _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_
 #define _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_
 #if defined(__WXMSW__)
 #include "wx/msw/accel.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
 #include "wx/motif/accel.h"
 #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/accel.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/accel.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/accel.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/accel.h"
 #endif
 #endif
    // _WX_ACCEL_H_BASE_
--- a/include/wx/app.h
+++ b/include/wx/app.h
@@ -9,34 +9,29 @@
 // Licence:   	wxWindows licence
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#ifndef _WX_APP_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __APPH_BASE__
-#define _WX_APP_H_BASE_
+#define __APPH_BASE__
-#ifdef __WXMSW__
+#ifndef __GTK__
 class WXDLLEXPORT wxApp;
 typedef wxApp* (*wxAppInitializerFunction) (void);
 #endif
 #include "wx/object.h"
-#ifndef __WXMSW__
+#ifdef __GTK__
 typedef wxObject* (*wxAppInitializerFunction) (void);  // returning wxApp* won't work with gcc
 #endif
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/app.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/app.h"
+#include "wx/xt/app.h"
-#elif defined(__WXQT__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/qt/app.h"
 #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/app.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/app.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/app.h"
 #endif
 // Having a global instance of this class allows
 // wxApp to be aware of the app creator function.
 // wxApp can then call this function to create a new
@@ -75,4 +70,4 @@ int main(int argc, char *argv[]) { return wxEntry(argc, argv); }
 #endif
-    // _WX_APP_H_BASE_
+    // __APPH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/bitmap.h
+++ b/include/wx/bitmap.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __BITMAPH_BASE__
-#define _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_
+#define __BITMAPH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/bitmap.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/bitmap.h"
+#include "wx/xt/bitmap.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/bitmap.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/bitmap.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/bitmap.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/bitmap.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_BITMAP_H_BASE_
+    // __BITMAPH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/bmpbuttn.h
+++ b/include/wx/bmpbuttn.h
@@ -1,18 +1,12 @@
-#ifndef _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __BMPBUTTONH_BASE__
-#define _WX_BMPBUTTON_H_BASE_
+#define __BMPBUTTONH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/bmpbuttn.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/bmpbuttn.h"
+#include "wx/xt/bmpbuttn.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/bmpbuttn.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/bmpbuttn.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/bmpbuttn.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/bmpbuttn.h"
 #endif
 #endif
--- a/include/wx/brush.h
+++ b/include/wx/brush.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __BRUSHH_BASE__
-#define _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_
+#define __BRUSHH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/brush.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/brush.h"
+#include "wx/xt/brush.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/brush.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/brush.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/brush.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/brush.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_BRUSH_H_BASE_
+    // __BRUSHH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/button.h
+++ b/include/wx/button.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __BUTTONH_BASE__
-#define _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_
+#define __BUTTONH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/button.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/button.h"
+#include "wx/xt/button.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/button.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/button.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/button.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/button.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_BUTTON_H_BASE_
+    // __BUTTONH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/checkbox.h
+++ b/include/wx/checkbox.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __CHECKBOXH_BASE__
-#define _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_
+#define __CHECKBOXH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/checkbox.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/checkbox.h"
+#include "wx/xt/checkbox.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/checkbox.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/checkbox.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/checkbox.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/checkbox.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_CHECKBOX_H_BASE_
+    // __CHECKBOXH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/checklst.h
+++ b/include/wx/checklst.h
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
 #ifndef _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_
 #define _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_
 #if defined(__WXMSW__)
 #include "wx/msw/checklst.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
 #include "wx/motif/checklst.h"
 #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/checklst.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/checklst.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/checklst.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/checklst.h"
 #endif
 #endif
    // _WX_CHECKLST_H_BASE_
--- a/include/wx/choicdlg.h
+++ b/include/wx/choicdlg.h
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
-#ifndef _WX_CHOICDLG_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __CHOICDLGH_BASE__
-#define _WX_CHOICDLG_H_BASE_
+#define __CHOICDLGH_BASE__
 #include "wx/generic/choicdgg.h"
 #endif
-    // _WX_CHOICDLG_H_BASE_
+    // __CHOICDLGH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/choice.h
+++ b/include/wx/choice.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __CHOICEH_BASE__
-#define _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_
+#define __CHOICEH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/choice.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/choice.h"
+#include "wx/xt/choice.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/choice.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/choice.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/choice.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/choice.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_CHOICE_H_BASE_
+    // __CHOICEH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/clipbrd.h
+++ b/include/wx/clipbrd.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __CLIPBRDH_BASE__
-#define _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_
+#define __CLIPBRDH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/clipbrd.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/clipbrd.h"
+#include "wx/xt/clipbrd.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/clipbrd.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/gtk/clipbrd.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/clipbrd.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/clipbrd.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_CLIPBRD_H_BASE_
+    // __CLIPBRDH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/cmndata.h
+++ b/include/wx/cmndata.h
@@ -9,16 +9,13 @@
 // Licence:   	wxWindows licence
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#ifndef _WX_CMNDATA_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __CMNDATAH_BASE__
-#define _WX_CMNDATA_H_BASE_
+#define __CMNDATAH_BASE__
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "cmndata.h"
 #endif
 #include "wx/font.h"
 #include "wx/colour.h"
 class WXDLLEXPORT wxColourData: public wxObject
 {
 DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxColourData)
@@ -85,7 +82,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxPrintData: public wxObject
  DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxPrintData)
 public:
-#ifdef __WXMSW__
+#ifdef __WINDOWS__
  void *printData;
 #endif
  int printFromPage;
@@ -140,7 +137,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxPrintData: public wxObject
  void operator=(const wxPrintData& data);
-#ifdef __WXMSW__
+#ifdef __WINDOWS__
  // Convert to/from the PRINTDLG structure
  void ConvertToNative(void);
  void ConvertFromNative(void);
@@ -223,4 +220,4 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxPageSetupData: public wxObject
 #endif
-    // _WX_CMNDATA_H_BASE_
+    // __CMNDATAH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/colordlg.h
+++ b/include/wx/colordlg.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_COLORDLG_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __COLORDLGH_BASE__
-#define _WX_COLORDLG_H_BASE_
+#define __COLORDLGH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/colordlg.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
 #include "wx/generic/colrdlgg.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/generic/colrdlgg.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/generic/colrdlgg.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/generic/colrdlgg.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/generic/colrdlgg.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_COLORDLG_H_BASE_
+    // __COLORDLGH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/colour.h
+++ b/include/wx/colour.h
@@ -1,19 +0,0 @@
 #ifndef _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_
 #define _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_
 #if defined(__WXMSW__)
 #include "wx/msw/colour.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
 #include "wx/motif/colour.h"
 #elif defined(__WXGTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/colour.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/colour.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/colour.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/colour.h"
 #endif
 #endif
    // _WX_COLOUR_H_BASE_
--- a/include/wx/combobox.h
+++ b/include/wx/combobox.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __COMBOBOXH_BASE__
-#define _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_
+#define __COMBOBOXH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/combobox.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/combobox.h"
+#include "wx/xt/combobox.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/combobox.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/combobox.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/combobox.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/combobox.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_COMBOBOX_H_BASE_
+    // __COMBOBOXH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/confbase.h
+++ b/include/wx/confbase.h
@@ -1,292 +0,0 @@
 ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // Name:        confbase.h
 // Purpose:     declaration of the base class of all config implementations
 //              (see also: fileconf.h and msw/regconf.h)
 // Author:      Karsten Ball<6C>der & Vadim Zeitlin
 // Modified by:
 // Created:     07.04.98 (adapted from appconf.h)
 // RCS-ID:      $Id$
 // Copyright:   (c) 1997 Karsten Ball<6C>der   Ballueder@usa.net
 //                       Vadim Zeitlin      <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
 // Licence:     wxWindows license
 ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 #ifndef   _WX_CONFBASE_H_
 #define   _WX_CONFBASE_H_
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "confbase.h"
 #endif
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // compile options
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // it won't compile without it anyhow
 #ifndef USE_CONFIG
  #error "Please define USE_CONFIG or remove config.cpp from your makefile"
 #endif // USE_CONFIG
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // constants
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 /// shall we be case sensitive in parsing variable names?
 #ifndef wxCONFIG_CASE_SENSITIVE
  #define  wxCONFIG_CASE_SENSITIVE       FALSE
 #endif
 /// separates group and entry names (probably shouldn't be changed)
 #ifndef wxCONFIG_PATH_SEPARATOR
  #define   wxCONFIG_PATH_SEPARATOR     '/'
 #endif
 /// introduces immutable entries
 // (i.e. the ones which can't be changed from the local config file)
 #ifndef wxCONFIG_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX
  #define   wxCONFIG_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX   '!'
 #endif
 /// should we use registry instead of configuration files under Win32?
 // (i.e. whether wxConfigBase::Create() will create a wxFileConfig (if it's
 //  FALSE) or wxRegConfig (if it's true and we're under Win32) or wxIniConfig
 //  (under Win16))
 #ifndef   wxCONFIG_WIN32_NATIVE
  #define wxCONFIG_WIN32_NATIVE          TRUE
 #endif
 // Style flags for constructor style parameter
 #define wxCONFIG_USE_LOCAL_FILE         1
 #define wxCONFIG_USE_GLOBAL_FILE        2
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // various helper global functions
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 /*
  Replace environment variables ($SOMETHING) with their values. The format is
  $VARNAME or ${VARNAME} where VARNAME contains alphanumeric characters and
  '_' only. '$' must be escaped ('\$') in order to be taken literally.
 */
 extern wxString wxExpandEnvVars(const wxString &sz);
 /*
  Split path into parts removing '..' in progress
 */
 extern void wxSplitPath(wxArrayString& aParts, const char *sz);
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // abstract base class wxConfigBase which defines the interface for derived 
 // classes
 //
 // wxConfig organizes the items in a tree-like structure (modeled after the
 // Unix/Dos filesystem). There are groups (directories) and keys (files).
 // There is always one current group given by the current path.
 //
 // Keys are pairs "key_name = value" where value may be of string or integer
 // (long) type (@@@ doubles and other types such as wxDate coming soon).
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 class wxConfigBase
 {
 public:
  // static functions
    // sets the config object, returns the previous pointer
  static wxConfigBase *Set(wxConfigBase *pConfig);
    // get the config object, creates it on demand unless DontCreateOnDemand
    // was called
  static wxConfigBase *Get() { if ( !ms_pConfig ) Create(); return ms_pConfig; }
    // create a new config object: this function will create the "best"
    // implementation of wxConfig available for the current platform, see
    // comments near definition wxCONFIG_WIN32_NATIVE for details. It returns
    // the created object and also sets it as ms_pConfig.
  static wxConfigBase *Create();
    // should Get() try to create a new log object if the current one is NULL?
  static void DontCreateOnDemand() { ms_bAutoCreate = FALSE; }
  // ctor & virtual dtor
    // environment variable expansion is on by default
 //  wxConfigBase() { m_bExpandEnvVars = TRUE; m_bRecordDefaults = FALSE; }
  // ctor
  // Not all args will always be used by derived classes, but
  // including them all in each class ensures compatibility.
  // If appName is empty, uses wxApp name
  wxConfigBase(const wxString& appName = "", const wxString& vendorName = "",
               const wxString& localFilename = "", const wxString& globalFilename = "",
               long style = 0);
    // empty but ensures that dtor of all derived classes is virtual
  virtual ~wxConfigBase() { }
  // path management
    // set current path: if the first character is '/', it's the absolute path,
    // otherwise it's a relative path. '..' is supported. If the strPath
    // doesn't exist it is created.
  virtual void SetPath(const wxString& strPath) = 0;
    // retrieve the current path (always as absolute path)
  virtual const wxString& GetPath() const = 0;
  // enumeration: all functions here return false when there are no more items.
  // you must pass the same lIndex to GetNext and GetFirst (don't modify it)
    // enumerate subgroups
  virtual bool GetFirstGroup(wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
  virtual bool GetNextGroup (wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
    // enumerate entries
  virtual bool GetFirstEntry(wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
  virtual bool GetNextEntry (wxString& str, long& lIndex) const = 0;
    // get number of entries/subgroups in the current group, with or without
    // it's subgroups
  virtual size_t GetNumberOfEntries(bool bRecursive = FALSE) const = 0;
  virtual size_t GetNumberOfGroups(bool bRecursive = FALSE) const = 0;
  // tests of existence
    // returns TRUE if the group by this name exists
  virtual bool HasGroup(const wxString& strName) const = 0;
    // same as above, but for an entry
  virtual bool HasEntry(const wxString& strName) const = 0;
    // returns TRUE if either a group or an entry with a given name exist
  bool Exists(const wxString& strName) const
    { return HasGroup(strName) || HasEntry(strName); }
  // key access: returns TRUE if value was really read, FALSE if default used
  // (and if the key is not found the default value is returned.)
    // read a string from the key
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString *pStr) const = 0;
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, wxString *pStr, const wxString& defVal) const;
  virtual wxString Read(const wxString& key, const wxString& defVal = "") const;
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, long *pl) const = 0;
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, long *pl, long defVal) const;
  virtual long Read(const wxString& strKey, long defVal) const
    { long l; Read(strKey, &l, defVal); return l; }
  // Convenience functions that are built on other forms
  // double
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, double* val) const;
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, double* val, double defVal) const;
  // bool
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* val) const;
  virtual bool Read(const wxString& key, bool* val, bool defVal) const;
    // write the value (return true on success)
  virtual bool Write(const wxString& key, const wxString& value) = 0;
  virtual bool Write(const wxString& key, long value) = 0;
  // Convenience functions
  virtual bool Write(const wxString& key, double value);
  virtual bool Write(const wxString& key, bool value);
    // permanently writes all changes
  virtual bool Flush(bool bCurrentOnly = FALSE) = 0;
  // delete entries/groups
    // deletes the specified entry and the group it belongs to if
    // it was the last key in it and the second parameter is true
  virtual bool DeleteEntry(const wxString& key,
                           bool bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE) = 0;
    // delete the group (with all subgroups)
  virtual bool DeleteGroup(const wxString& key) = 0;
    // delete the whole underlying object (disk file, registry key, ...)
    // primarly for use by desinstallation routine.
  virtual bool DeleteAll() = 0;
  // options
    // we can automatically expand environment variables in the config entries
    // (this option is on by default, you can turn it on/off at any time)
  bool IsExpandingEnvVars() const { return m_bExpandEnvVars; }
  void SetExpandEnvVars(bool bDoIt = TRUE) { m_bExpandEnvVars = bDoIt; }
    // recording of default values
  void SetRecordDefaults(bool bDoIt = TRUE) { m_bRecordDefaults = bDoIt; }
  bool IsRecordingDefaults() const { return m_bRecordDefaults; }
  // does expansion only if needed
  wxString ExpandEnvVars(const wxString& str) const
    {
        wxString tmp; // Required for BC++
        if (IsExpandingEnvVars())
            tmp = wxExpandEnvVars(str);
        else
            tmp = str;
        return tmp;
    }
    // misc accessors
  inline wxString GetAppName() const { return m_appName; }
  inline wxString GetVendorName() const { return m_vendorName; }
  inline void SetAppName(const wxString& appName) { m_appName = appName; }
  inline void SetVendorName(const wxString& vendorName) { m_vendorName = vendorName; }
  inline void SetStyle(long style) { m_style = style; }
  inline long GetStyle() const { return m_style; }
 protected:
  static bool IsImmutable(const wxString& key)
    { return key[0] == wxCONFIG_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX; }
 private:
  // are we doing automatic environment variable expansion?
  bool m_bExpandEnvVars;
  // do we record default values?
  bool m_bRecordDefaults;
  // static variables
  static wxConfigBase *ms_pConfig;
  static bool          ms_bAutoCreate;
  // Application name and organisation name
  wxString          m_appName;
  wxString          m_vendorName;
  // Style flag
  long              m_style;
 };
  // a handy little class which changes current path to the path of given entry
  // and restores it in dtor: so if you declare a local variable of this type,
  // you work in the entry directory and the path is automatically restored
  // when the function returns
  // Taken out of wxConfig since not all compilers can cope with nested classes.
  class wxConfigPathChanger
  {
  public:
    // ctor/dtor do path changing/restorin
    wxConfigPathChanger(const wxConfigBase *pContainer, const wxString& strEntry);
   ~wxConfigPathChanger();
    // get the key name
    const wxString& Name() const { return m_strName; }
  private:
    wxConfigBase *m_pContainer;   // object we live in
    wxString      m_strName,      // name of entry (i.e. name only)
                  m_strOldPath;   // saved path
    bool          m_bChanged;     // was the path changed?
  };
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // the native wxConfigBase implementation
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // under Windows we prefer to use the native implementation
 #if defined(__WXMSW__) && wxCONFIG_WIN32_NATIVE
  #ifdef __WIN32__
    #define wxConfig  wxRegConfig
    #define classwxConfig classwxRegConfig
  #else  //WIN16
    #define wxConfig  wxIniConfig
    #define classwxConfig classwxIniConfig
  #endif
 #else // either we're under Unix or wish to use files even under Windows
  #define wxConfig  wxFileConfig
  #define classwxConfig classwxFileConfig
 #endif
 #endif  // _WX_CONFIG_H_
--- a/include/wx/config.h
+++ b/include/wx/config.h
@@ -1,17 +1,186 @@
-#ifndef _WX_CONFIG_H_BASE_
+///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#define _WX_CONFIG_H_BASE_
+// Name:        config.h
 // Purpose:     declaration of the base class of all config implementations
 //              (see also: fileconf.h and msw/regconf.h)
 // Author:      Karsten Ball<6C>der & Vadim Zeitlin
 // Modified by: 
 // Created:     07.04.98 (adapted from appconf.h)
 // RCS-ID:      $Id$
 // Copyright:   (c) 1997 Karsten Ball<6C>der   Ballueder@usa.net  
 //                       Vadim Zeitlin      <zeitlin@dptmaths.ens-cachan.fr>
 // Licence:     wxWindows license
 ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#include "wx/confbase.h"
+#ifndef   _APPCONF_H
 #define   _APPCONF_H
-#if defined(__WXMSW__) && defined(wxCONFIG_WIN32_NATIVE)
+#ifdef __GNUG__
-#  ifdef __WIN32__
+#pragma interface "config.h"
 #    include "wx/msw/regconf.h"
 #else
 #    include "wx/msw/iniconf.h"
 #  endif
 #else
 #    include "wx/fileconf.h"
 #endif
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // compile options
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // it won't compile without it anyhow
 #ifndef USE_WXCONFIG
  #error "Please define USE_WXCONFIG or remove config.cpp from your makefile"
 #endif // USE_WXCONFIG
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // constants
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 /// shall we be case sensitive in parsing variable names?
 #ifndef APPCONF_CASE_SENSITIVE
  #define  APPCONF_CASE_SENSITIVE       FALSE
 #endif
-    // _WX_CONFIG_H_BASE_
+
 /// separates group and entry names
 #ifndef APPCONF_PATH_SEPARATOR
  #define   APPCONF_PATH_SEPARATOR     '/'
 #endif
 /// introduces immutable entries
 #ifndef APPCONF_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX
  #define   APPCONF_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX   '!'
 #endif
 /// should we use registry instead of configuration files under Win32?
 #ifndef   APPCONF_WIN32_NATIVE
  #define APPCONF_WIN32_NATIVE          TRUE
 #endif
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // various helper global functions
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 /*
  Replace environment variables ($SOMETHING) with their values. The format is
  $VARNAME or ${VARNAME} where VARNAME contains alphanumeric characters and
  '_' only. '$' must be escaped ('\$') in order to be taken literally.
 */
 extern wxString ExpandEnvVars(const wxString& str);
 /*
  Split path into parts removing '..' in progress
 */
 extern void SplitPath(wxArrayString& aParts, const char *sz);
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // abstract base class wxConfig which defines the interface for derived classes
 //
 // wxConfig organizes the items in a tree-like structure (modeled after the 
 // Unix/Dos filesystem). There are groups (directories) and keys (files). 
 // There is always one current group given by the current path.
 //
 // Keys are pairs "key_name = value" where value may be of string or integer
 // (long) type (@@@ doubles and other types such as wxDate coming soon).
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 class wxConfig
 {
 public:
  // static functions
    // sets the config object, returns the previous pointer
  static wxConfig *Set(wxConfig *pConfig);
    // get the config object, creates it on demand
  static wxConfig *Get() { if ( !ms_pConfig ) Create(); return ms_pConfig; }
    // create a new config object
  static void Create();
  // ctor & virtual dtor
  wxConfig() { }
  virtual ~wxConfig();
  // path management
    // set current path: if the first character is '/', it's the absolute path,
    // otherwise it's a relative path. '..' is supported. If the strPath 
    // doesn't exist it is created.
  virtual void SetPath(const wxString& strPath) = 0;
    // retrieve the current path (always as absolute path)
  virtual const wxString& GetPath() const = 0;
  // enumeration: all functions here return false when there are no more items.
  // you must pass the same lIndex to GetNext and GetFirst (don't modify it)
    // enumerate subgroups
  virtual bool GetFirstGroup(wxString& str, long& lIndex) = 0;
  virtual bool GetNextGroup (wxString& str, long& lIndex) = 0;
    // enumerate entries
  virtual bool GetFirstEntry(wxString& str, long& lIndex) = 0;
  virtual bool GetNextEntry (wxString& str, long& lIndex) = 0;
  // tests of existence
    // returns TRUE if the group by this name exists
  virtual bool HasGroup(const wxString& strName) const = 0;
    // same as above, but for an entry
  virtual bool HasEntry(const wxString& strName) const = 0;
    // returns TRUE if either a group or an entry with a given name exist
  bool Exists(const wxString& strName) const
    { return HasGroup(strName) || HasEntry(strName); }
  // key access: returns TRUE if value was really read, FALSE if default used
  // (and if the key is not found the default value is returned.)
    // read a string from the key
  virtual bool Read(wxString *pStr, const char *szKey,
                    const char *szDefault = NULL) const = 0;
    // another version using statis buffer - it means it will be overwritten
    // after each call to this function!
  virtual const char *Read(const char *szKey,
                           const char *szDefault = NULL) const;
    // the same for longs
  virtual long Read(const char *szKey, long lDefault) const
    { long l; Read(&l, szKey, lDefault); return l; }
    // and another version: returns true if default value is returned
  virtual bool Read(long *pl, const char *szKey, long lDefault = 0) const = 0;
    // write the value (return true on success)
  virtual bool Write(const char *szKey, const char *szValue) = 0;
  virtual bool Write(const char *szKey, long lValue) = 0;
    // permanently writes all changes
  virtual bool Flush(bool bCurrentOnly = FALSE) = 0;
  // delete entries/groups
    // deletes the specified entry and the group it belongs to if
    // it was the last key in it and the second parameter is true
  virtual bool DeleteEntry(const char *szKey,
                           bool bDeleteGroupIfEmpty = TRUE) = 0;
    // delete the group (with all subgroups)
  virtual bool DeleteGroup(const char *szKey) = 0;
    // delete the whole underlying object (disk file, registry key, ...)
    // primarly for use by desinstallation routine.
  virtual bool DeleteAll() = 0;
 protected:
  static bool IsImmutable(const char *szKey) 
    { return *szKey == APPCONF_IMMUTABLE_PREFIX; }
  // a handy little class which changes current path to the path of given entry
  // and restores it in dtor: so if you declare a local variable of this type,
  // you work in the entry directory and the path is automatically restored
  // when function returns
  class PathChanger
  {
  public:
    // ctor/dtor do path changing/restorin
    PathChanger(const wxConfig *pContainer, const wxString& strEntry);
   ~PathChanger();
    // get the key name
   const wxString& Name() const { return m_strName; }
  private:
    wxConfig *m_pContainer;   // object we live in
    wxString  m_strName,      // name of entry (i.e. name only)
              m_strOldPath;   // saved path
    bool      m_bChanged;     // was the path changed?
  };
  // are we doing automatic environment variable expansion?
  bool m_bExpandEnvVars;
  // static variables
  static wxConfig *ms_pConfig;
 };
 #endif  //_APPCONF_H
--- a/include/wx/control.h
+++ b/include/wx/control.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __CONTROLH_BASE__
-#define _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_
+#define __CONTROLH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/control.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/control.h"
+#include "wx/xt/control.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/control.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/control.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/control.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/control.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_CONTROL_H_BASE_
+    // __CONTROLH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/cursor.h
+++ b/include/wx/cursor.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __CURSORH_BASE__
-#define _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_
+#define __CURSORH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/cursor.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/cursor.h"
+#include "wx/xt/cursor.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/cursor.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/cursor.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/cursor.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/cursor.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_CURSOR_H_BASE_
+    // __CURSORH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/date.h
+++ b/include/wx/date.h
@@ -10,8 +10,8 @@
 // Licence:   	wxWindows licence
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#ifndef _WX_DATE_H_
+#ifndef __WXDATEH__
-#define _WX_DATE_H_
+#define __WXDATEH__
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "date.h"
@@ -128,4 +128,4 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDate: public wxObject
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DATE_H_
+    // __WXDATEH__
--- a/include/wx/datstrm.h
+++ b/include/wx/datstrm.h
@@ -9,19 +9,22 @@
 // Licence:   	wxWindows license
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#ifndef _WX_DATSTREAM_H_
+#ifndef __DATSTREAMH__
-#define _WX_DATSTREAM_H_
+#define __DATSTREAMH__
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "datstrm.h"
 #endif
-#include <wx/stream.h>
+#include "wx/wx.h"
-class wxDataInputStream: public wxFilterInputStream {
+class wxDataStream {
 public:
-  wxDataInputStream(wxInputStream& s);
+  wxDataStream(iostream& s);
-  virtual ~wxDataInputStream();
+  wxDataStream(istream& s);
  wxDataStream(ostream& s);
  virtual ~wxDataStream();
  unsigned long Read32();
  unsigned short Read16();
@@ -29,12 +32,6 @@ public:
  double ReadDouble();
  wxString ReadLine();
  wxString ReadString();
 };
 class wxDataOutputStream: public wxFilterOutputStream {
 public:
  wxDataOutputStream(wxOutputStream& s);
  virtual ~wxDataOutputStream();
  void Write32(unsigned long i);
  void Write16(unsigned short i);
@@ -42,7 +39,10 @@ class wxDataOutputStream: public wxFilterOutputStream {
  void WriteDouble(double d);
  void WriteLine(const wxString& line);
  void WriteString(const wxString& string);
 protected:
  istream *m_istream;
  ostream *m_ostream;
 };
 #endif
-    // _WX_DATSTREAM_H_
+    // __HELPBASEH__
--- a/include/wx/db.h
+++ b/include/wx/db.h
@@ -1,362 +0,0 @@
 ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // Name:        db.h
 // Purpose:     Header file wxDB class.  The wxDB class represents a connection
 //              to an ODBC data source.  The wxDB class allows operations on the data
 //              source such as opening and closing the data source.
 // Author:      Doug Card
 // Modified by:
 // Created:     9.96
 // RCS-ID:      $Id$
 // Copyright:   (c) 1996 Remstar International, Inc.
 // Licence:     wxWindows licence, plus:
 // Notice:		This class library and its intellectual design are free of charge for use,
 //              modification, enhancement, debugging under the following conditions:
 //              1) These classes may only be used as part of the implementation of a
 //                 wxWindows-based application
 //              2) All enhancements and bug fixes are to be submitted back to the wxWindows
 //                 user groups free of all charges for use with the wxWindows library.
 //              3) These classes may not be distributed as part of any other class library,
 //                 DLL, text (written or electronic), other than a complete distribution of
 //                 the wxWindows GUI development toolkit.
 ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 /*
 // SYNOPSIS START
 // SYNOPSIS STOP
 */
 #ifndef DB_DOT_H
 #define DB_DOT_H
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "db.h"
 #endif
 #if defined(wx_msw) || defined(WIN32)
 #include <windows.h>
 #endif
 #define ODBCVER 0x0250
 #include <sql.h>
 #include <sqlext.h>
 enum		enumDummy		{enumDum1};
 #define SQL_C_BOOLEAN (sizeof(int) == 2 ? SQL_C_USHORT : SQL_C_ULONG)
 #define SQL_C_ENUM (sizeof(enumDummy) == 2 ? SQL_C_USHORT : SQL_C_ULONG)    //glt 2-21-97
 /*
 #ifndef Bool
 #define Bool int
 #endif
 #ifndef TRUE
 #define TRUE 1
 #endif
 #ifndef FALSE
 #define FALSE 0
 #endif
 */
 // Database Globals
 const DB_TYPE_NAME_LEN						= 40;
 const DB_MAX_STATEMENT_LEN					= 2048;
 const DB_MAX_WHERE_CLAUSE_LEN				= 1024;
 const DB_MAX_ERROR_MSG_LEN					= 512;
 const DB_MAX_ERROR_HISTORY					= 5;
 const DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN				= 128;
 const DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN				= 128;
 const DB_DATA_TYPE_VARCHAR					= 1;
 const DB_DATA_TYPE_INTEGER					= 2;
 const DB_DATA_TYPE_FLOAT					= 3;
 const	DB_DATA_TYPE_DATE						= 4;
 const DB_SELECT_KEYFIELDS					= 1;
 const DB_SELECT_WHERE						= 2;
 const DB_SELECT_MATCHING					= 3;
 const DB_SELECT_STATEMENT					= 4;
 const DB_UPD_KEYFIELDS						= 1;
 const DB_UPD_WHERE							= 2;
 const DB_DEL_KEYFIELDS						= 1;
 const DB_DEL_WHERE							= 2;
 const DB_DEL_MATCHING						= 3;
 const DB_WHERE_KEYFIELDS					= 1;
 const DB_WHERE_MATCHING						= 2;
 const DB_CURSOR0								= 0;
 const DB_CURSOR1								= 1;
 const DB_CURSOR2								= 2;
 //const DB_CURSOR3							= 3;
 //const DB_CURSOR4							= 4;
 //const DB_CURSOR5							= 5;
 const DB_GRANT_SELECT						= 1;
 const DB_GRANT_INSERT						= 2;
 const DB_GRANT_UPDATE						= 4;
 const DB_GRANT_DELETE						= 8;
 const DB_GRANT_ALL							= DB_GRANT_SELECT | DB_GRANT_INSERT | DB_GRANT_UPDATE | DB_GRANT_DELETE;
 // ODBC Error codes (derived from ODBC SqlState codes)
 enum ODBC_ERRORS
 {
 	DB_FAILURE									= 0,
 	DB_SUCCESS									= 1,
 	DB_ERR_NOT_IN_USE,
 	DB_ERR_GENERAL_WARNING,									// SqlState = '01000'
 	DB_ERR_DISCONNECT_ERROR,								// SqlState = '01002'
 	DB_ERR_DATA_TRUNCATED,									// SqlState = '01004'
 	DB_ERR_PRIV_NOT_REVOKED,								// SqlState = '01006'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_CONN_STR_ATTR,							// SqlState = '01S00'
 	DB_ERR_ERROR_IN_ROW,										// SqlState = '01S01'
 	DB_ERR_OPTION_VALUE_CHANGED,							// SqlState = '01S02'
 	DB_ERR_NO_ROWS_UPD_OR_DEL,								// SqlState = '01S03'
 	DB_ERR_MULTI_ROWS_UPD_OR_DEL,							// SqlState = '01S04'
 	DB_ERR_WRONG_NO_OF_PARAMS,								// SqlState = '07001'
 	DB_ERR_DATA_TYPE_ATTR_VIOL,							// SqlState = '07006'
 	DB_ERR_UNABLE_TO_CONNECT,								// SqlState = '08001'
 	DB_ERR_CONNECTION_IN_USE,								// SqlState = '08002'
 	DB_ERR_CONNECTION_NOT_OPEN,							// SqlState = '08003'
 	DB_ERR_REJECTED_CONNECTION,							// SqlState = '08004'
 	DB_ERR_CONN_FAIL_IN_TRANS,								// SqlState = '08007'
 	DB_ERR_COMM_LINK_FAILURE,								// SqlState = '08S01'
 	DB_ERR_INSERT_VALUE_LIST_MISMATCH,					// SqlState = '21S01'
 	DB_ERR_DERIVED_TABLE_MISMATCH,						// SqlState = '21S02'
 	DB_ERR_STRING_RIGHT_TRUNC,								// SqlState = '22001'
 	DB_ERR_NUMERIC_VALUE_OUT_OF_RNG,						// SqlState = '22003'
 	DB_ERR_ERROR_IN_ASSIGNMENT,							// SqlState = '22005'
 	DB_ERR_DATETIME_FLD_OVERFLOW,							// SqlState = '22008'
 	DB_ERR_DIVIDE_BY_ZERO,									// SqlState = '22012'
 	DB_ERR_STR_DATA_LENGTH_MISMATCH,						// SqlState = '22026'
 	DB_ERR_INTEGRITY_CONSTRAINT_VIOL,					// SqlState = '23000'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_CURSOR_STATE,							// SqlState = '24000'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_TRANS_STATE,							// SqlState = '25000'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_AUTH_SPEC,								// SqlState = '28000'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_CURSOR_NAME,							// SqlState = '34000'
 	DB_ERR_SYNTAX_ERROR_OR_ACCESS_VIOL,					// SqlState = '37000'
 	DB_ERR_DUPLICATE_CURSOR_NAME,							// SqlState = '3C000'
 	DB_ERR_SERIALIZATION_FAILURE,							// SqlState = '40001'
 	DB_ERR_SYNTAX_ERROR_OR_ACCESS_VIOL2,				// SqlState = '42000'
 	DB_ERR_OPERATION_ABORTED,								// SqlState = '70100'
 	DB_ERR_UNSUPPORTED_FUNCTION,							// SqlState = 'IM001'
 	DB_ERR_NO_DATA_SOURCE,									// SqlState = 'IM002'
 	DB_ERR_DRIVER_LOAD_ERROR,								// SqlState = 'IM003'
 	DB_ERR_SQLALLOCENV_FAILED,								// SqlState = 'IM004'
 	DB_ERR_SQLALLOCCONNECT_FAILED,						// SqlState = 'IM005'
 	DB_ERR_SQLSETCONNECTOPTION_FAILED,					// SqlState = 'IM006'
 	DB_ERR_NO_DATA_SOURCE_DLG_PROHIB,					// SqlState = 'IM007'
 	DB_ERR_DIALOG_FAILED,									// SqlState = 'IM008'
 	DB_ERR_UNABLE_TO_LOAD_TRANSLATION_DLL,				// SqlState = 'IM009'
 	DB_ERR_DATA_SOURCE_NAME_TOO_LONG,					// SqlState = 'IM010'
 	DB_ERR_DRIVER_NAME_TOO_LONG,							// SqlState = 'IM011'
 	DB_ERR_DRIVER_KEYWORD_SYNTAX_ERROR,					// SqlState = 'IM012'
 	DB_ERR_TRACE_FILE_ERROR,								// SqlState = 'IM013'
 	DB_ERR_TABLE_OR_VIEW_ALREADY_EXISTS,				// SqlState = 'S0001'
 	DB_ERR_TABLE_NOT_FOUND,									// SqlState = 'S0002'
 	DB_ERR_INDEX_ALREADY_EXISTS,							// SqlState = 'S0011'
 	DB_ERR_INDEX_NOT_FOUND,									// SqlState = 'S0012'
 	DB_ERR_COLUMN_ALREADY_EXISTS,							// SqlState = 'S0021'
 	DB_ERR_COLUMN_NOT_FOUND,								// SqlState = 'S0022'
 	DB_ERR_NO_DEFAULT_FOR_COLUMN,							// SqlState = 'S0023'
 	DB_ERR_GENERAL_ERROR,									// SqlState = 'S1000'
 	DB_ERR_MEMORY_ALLOCATION_FAILURE,					// SqlState = 'S1001'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_COLUMN_NUMBER,							// SqlState = 'S1002'
 	DB_ERR_PROGRAM_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,					// SqlState = 'S1003'
 	DB_ERR_SQL_DATA_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,					// SqlState = 'S1004'
 	DB_ERR_OPERATION_CANCELLED,							// SqlState = 'S1008'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_ARGUMENT_VALUE,						// SqlState = 'S1009'
 	DB_ERR_FUNCTION_SEQUENCE_ERROR,						// SqlState = 'S1010'
 	DB_ERR_OPERATION_INVALID_AT_THIS_TIME,				// SqlState = 'S1011'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_TRANS_OPERATION_CODE,				// SqlState = 'S1012'
 	DB_ERR_NO_CURSOR_NAME_AVAIL,							// SqlState = 'S1015'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_STR_OR_BUF_LEN,						// SqlState = 'S1090'
 	DB_ERR_DESCRIPTOR_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,				// SqlState = 'S1091'
 	DB_ERR_OPTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,						// SqlState = 'S1092'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_PARAM_NO,								// SqlState = 'S1093'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_SCALE_VALUE,							// SqlState = 'S1094'
 	DB_ERR_FUNCTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,					// SqlState = 'S1095'
 	DB_ERR_INF_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,							// SqlState = 'S1096'
 	DB_ERR_COLUMN_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,						// SqlState = 'S1097'
 	DB_ERR_SCOPE_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,						// SqlState = 'S1098'
 	DB_ERR_NULLABLE_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,					// SqlState = 'S1099'
 	DB_ERR_UNIQUENESS_OPTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,		// SqlState = 'S1100'
 	DB_ERR_ACCURACY_OPTION_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,			// SqlState = 'S1101'
 	DB_ERR_DIRECTION_OPTION_OUT_OF_RANGE,				// SqlState = 'S1103'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_PRECISION_VALUE,						// SqlState = 'S1104'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_PARAM_TYPE,								// SqlState = 'S1105'
 	DB_ERR_FETCH_TYPE_OUT_OF_RANGE,						// SqlState = 'S1106'
 	DB_ERR_ROW_VALUE_OUT_OF_RANGE,						// SqlState = 'S1107'
 	DB_ERR_CONCURRENCY_OPTION_OUT_OF_RANGE,			// SqlState = 'S1108'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_CURSOR_POSITION,						// SqlState = 'S1109'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_DRIVER_COMPLETION,					// SqlState = 'S1110'
 	DB_ERR_INVALID_BOOKMARK_VALUE,						// SqlState = 'S1111'
 	DB_ERR_DRIVER_NOT_CAPABLE,								// SqlState = 'S1C00'
 	DB_ERR_TIMEOUT_EXPIRED									// SqlState = 'S1T00'
 };
 struct DbStuff
 {
 	HENV Henv;
 	char Dsn[SQL_MAX_DSN_LENGTH+1];	// Data Source Name
 	char Uid[20];							// User ID
 	char AuthStr[20];						// Authorization string (password)
 };
 typedef struct
 {
 	char	TypeName[DB_TYPE_NAME_LEN];
 	int	FsqlType;
 	long	Precision;
 	short	CaseSensitive;
 //	short MinimumScale;
 	short MaximumScale;
 } SqlTypeInfo;
 class CcolInf
 {
 public:
 	char tableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1];
 	char colName[DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN+1];
 	int  sqlDataType;
 };
 class wxDB
 {
 private:
 	// Private data
 	bool dbIsOpen;
 	char *dsn;			// Data source name
 	char *uid;			// User ID
 	char *authStr;		// Authorization string (password)
 	// Private member functions
 	bool getDbInfo(void);
 	bool getDataTypeInfo(SWORD fSqlType, SqlTypeInfo &structSQLTypeInfo);
 	bool setConnectionOptions(void);
 	void logError(char *errMsg, char *SQLState);
 public:
 	// The following structure contains database information gathered from the
 	// datasource when the datasource is first opened.
 	struct
 	{
 		char   dbmsName[40];								// Name of the dbms product
 		char   dbmsVer[20];								// Version # of the dbms product
 		char   driverName[40];							// Driver name
 		char   odbcVer[20];								// ODBC version of the driver
 		char   drvMgrOdbcVer[20];						// ODBC version of the driver manager
 		char   driverVer[40];							// Driver version
 		char   serverName[40];							// Server Name, typically a connect string
 		char	 databaseName[128];						// Database filename
 		char   outerJoins[2];							// Indicates whether the data source supports outer joins
 		char	 procedureSupport[2];					// Indicates whether the data source supports stored procedures
 		UWORD  maxConnections;							// Maximum # of connections the data source supports
 		UWORD  maxStmts;									// Maximum # of HSTMTs per HDBC
 		UWORD  apiConfLvl;								// ODBC API conformance level
 		UWORD  cliConfLvl;								// Indicates whether the data source is SAG compliant
 		UWORD  sqlConfLvl;								// SQL conformance level
 		UWORD  cursorCommitBehavior;					// Indicates how cursors are affected by a db commit
 		UWORD  cursorRollbackBehavior;				// Indicates how cursors are affected by a db rollback
 		UWORD  supportNotNullClause;					// Indicates if data source supports NOT NULL clause
 		char   supportIEF[2];							// Integrity Enhancement Facility (Referential Integrity)
 		UDWORD txnIsolation;								// Default transaction isolation level supported by the driver
 		UDWORD txnIsolationOptions;					// Transaction isolation level options available
 		UDWORD fetchDirections;							// Fetch directions supported
 		UDWORD lockTypes;									// Lock types supported in SQLSetPos
 		UDWORD posOperations;							// Position operations supported in SQLSetPos
 		UDWORD posStmts;									// Position statements supported
 		UDWORD scrollConcurrency;						// Concurrency control options supported for scrollable cursors
 		UDWORD scrollOptions;							// Scroll Options supported for scrollable cursors
 		UDWORD staticSensitivity;						// Indicates if additions, deletions and updates can be detected
 		UWORD  txnCapable;								// Indicates if the data source supports transactions
 		UDWORD loginTimeout;								// Number seconds to wait for a login request
 	} dbInf;
 	// ODBC handles
 	HENV  henv;		// ODBC Environment handle
 	HDBC  hdbc;		// ODBC DB Connection handle
 	HSTMT hstmt;	// ODBC Statement handle
 	// ODBC Error Inf.
 	char   sqlState[20];
 	SDWORD nativeError;
 	char   errorMsg[SQL_MAX_MESSAGE_LENGTH];
 	SWORD  cbErrorMsg;
 	char   errorList[DB_MAX_ERROR_HISTORY][DB_MAX_ERROR_MSG_LEN];
 	int    DB_STATUS;
 	//Error reporting mode
 	bool silent;
 	// Inf. about logical data types VARCHAR, INTEGER, FLOAT and DATE.
 	// This inf. is obtained from the ODBC driver by use of the
 	// SQLGetTypeInfo() function.  The key piece of inf. is the
 	// type name the data source uses for each logical data type.
 	// e.g. VARCHAR; Oracle calls it VARCHAR2.
 	SqlTypeInfo typeInfVarchar, typeInfInteger, typeInfFloat, typeInfDate;
 	// Public member functions
 	wxDB(HENV &aHenv);
 	bool		Open(char *Dsn, char *Uid, char *AuthStr);  // Data Source Name, User ID, Password
 	void		Close(void);
 	bool		CommitTrans(void);
 	bool		RollbackTrans(void);
   bool		DispAllErrors(HENV aHenv, HDBC aHdbc = SQL_NULL_HDBC, HSTMT aHstmt = SQL_NULL_HSTMT);
   bool		GetNextError(HENV aHenv, HDBC aHdbc = SQL_NULL_HDBC, HSTMT aHstmt = SQL_NULL_HSTMT);
   void		DispNextError(void);
 	bool		CreateView(char *viewName, char *colList, char *pSqlStmt);
 	bool		ExecSql(char *pSqlStmt);
 	bool	   Grant(int privileges, char *tableName, char *userList = "PUBLIC");
 	int	   TranslateSqlState(char *SQLState);
 	CcolInf *GetColumns(char *tableName[]);
 	char	  *GetDatabaseName(void)	{return dbInf.dbmsName;}
 	char	  *GetDataSource(void)		{return dsn;}
 	char	  *GetUsername(void)			{return uid;}
 	char	  *GetPassword(void)			{return authStr;}
 	bool		IsOpen(void)				{return dbIsOpen;}
 	HENV		GetHENV(void)				{return henv;}
 	HDBC		GetHDBC(void)				{return hdbc;}
 	HSTMT		GetHSTMT(void)				{return hstmt;}
 	bool		TableExists(char *tableName);  // Table name can refer to a table, view, alias or synonym
 	void		LogError(char *errMsg, char *SQLState = 0) {logError(errMsg, SQLState);}
 };  // wxDB
 // This structure forms a node in a linked list.  The linked list of "DbList" objects
 // keeps track of allocated database connections.  This allows the application to
 // open more than one database connection through ODBC for multiple transaction support
 // or for multiple database support.
 struct DbList
 {
 	DbList *PtrPrev;							// Pointer to previous item in the list
 	char    Dsn[SQL_MAX_DSN_LENGTH+1];	// Data Source Name
 	wxDB	 *PtrDb;								// Pointer to the wxDB object
 	bool    Free;								// Is item free or in use?
 	DbList *PtrNext;							// Pointer to next item in the list
 };
 // The following routines allow a user to get new database connections, free them
 // for other code segments to use, or close all of them when the application has
 // completed.
 wxDB  *GetDbConnection(DbStuff *pDbStuff);
 bool  FreeDbConnection(wxDB *pDb);
 void  CloseDbConnections(void);
 int	NumberDbConnectionsInUse(void);
 // This routine allows you to query a driver manager
 // for a list of available datasources.  Call this routine
 // the first time using SQL_FETCH_FIRST.  Continue to call it
 // using SQL_FETCH_NEXT until you've exhausted the list.
 bool GetDataSource(HENV henv, char *Dsn, SWORD DsnMax, char *DsDesc, SWORD DsDescMax,
 						 UWORD direction = SQL_FETCH_NEXT);
 #endif
--- a/include/wx/dbtable.h
+++ b/include/wx/dbtable.h
@@ -1,165 +0,0 @@
 ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // Name:        table.h
 // Purpose:     Declaration of the wxTable class.
 // Author:      Doug Card
 // Modified by:
 // Created:     9.96
 // RCS-ID:      $Id$
 // Copyright:   (c) 1996 Remstar International, Inc.
 // Licence:     wxWindows licence, plus:
 // Notice:		This class library and its intellectual design are free of charge for use,
 //              modification, enhancement, debugging under the following conditions:
 //              1) These classes may only be used as part of the implementation of a
 //                 wxWindows-based application
 //              2) All enhancements and bug fixes are to be submitted back to the wxWindows
 //                 user groups free of all charges for use with the wxWindows library.
 //              3) These classes may not be distributed as part of any other class library,
 //                 DLL, text (written or electronic), other than a complete distribution of
 //                 the wxWindows GUI development toolkit.
 ///////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 /*
 // SYNOPSIS START
 // SYNOPSIS STOP
 */
 #ifndef TABLE_DOT_H
 #define TABLE_DOT_H
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "dbtable.h"
 #endif
 #include "wx/db.h"
 const ROWID_LEN = 24;  // 18 is the max, 24 is in case it gets larger
 // The following class is used to define a column of a table.
 // The wxTable constructor will dynamically allocate as many of
 // these as there are columns in the table.  The class derived
 // from wxTable must initialize these column definitions in it's
 // constructor.  These column definitions provide inf. to the
 // wxTable class which allows it to create a table in the data
 // source, exchange data between the data source and the C++
 // object, and so on.
 class CcolDef
 {
 public:
 	char		 ColName[DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN+1];	// Column Name  glt 4/19/97 added one for the null terminator
 	int		 DbDataType;								// Logical Data Type; e.g. DB_DATA_TYPE_INTEGER
 	int		 SqlCtype;									// C data type; e.g. SQL_C_LONG
 	void		*PtrDataObj;								// Address of the data object
 	int		 SzDataObj;									// Size, in bytes, of the data object
 	bool		 KeyField;									// TRUE if this column is part of the PRIMARY KEY to the table; Date fields should NOT be KeyFields.
 	bool		 Updateable;								// Specifies whether this column is updateable
 	bool		 InsertAllowed;							// Specifies whether this column should be included in an INSERT statement
 	bool		 DerivedCol;								// Specifies whether this column is a derived value
 	SDWORD	 CbValue;									// Internal use only!!!
 };  // CcolDef
 // This structure is used when creating secondary indexes.
 class CidxDef
 {
 public:
 	char		 ColName[DB_MAX_COLUMN_NAME_LEN+1];	// Column Name  glt 4/19/97 added one for the null terminator
 	bool		 Ascending;
 };  // CidxDef
 class wxTable
 {
 private:
 	// Private member variables
 	int currCursorNo;
 	// Private member functions
 	bool bindInsertParams(void);
 	bool bindUpdateParams(void);
 	bool bindCols(HSTMT cursor);
 	bool getRec(UWORD fetchType);
 	bool execDelete(char *pSqlStmt);
 	bool execUpdate(char *pSqlStmt);
 	bool query(int queryType, bool forUpdate, bool distinct, char *pSqlStmt = 0);
 public:
 	// Pointer to the database object this table belongs to
 	wxDB *pDb;
 	// ODBC Handles
 	HENV  henv;							// ODBC Environment handle
 	HDBC  hdbc;							// ODBC DB Connection handle
 	HSTMT hstmt;						// ODBC Statement handle
 //	HSTMT c0, c1, c2, c3, c4, c5;	// Cursors 0 through 5
 	HSTMT c0, c1, c2;					// Limited to Cursors 0 through 2 for now
 	HSTMT hstmtInsert;				// ODBC Statement handle used specifically for inserts
 	HSTMT hstmtDelete;				// ODBC Statement handle used specifically for deletes
 	HSTMT hstmtUpdate;				// ODBC Statement handle used specifically for updates
 	HSTMT hstmtCount;					// ODBC Statement handle used specifically for COUNT(*)
 	// Table Inf.
 	char tableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1];			// Table name
 	char queryTableName[DB_MAX_TABLE_NAME_LEN+1];	// Query Table Name
 	int  noCols;												// # of columns in the table
 	// Column Definitions
 	CcolDef *colDefs;	// Array of CcolDef structures
 	// Where and Order By clauses
 	char *where;			// Standard SQL where clause, minus the word WHERE
 	char *orderBy;			// Standard SQL order by clause, minus the ORDER BY
 	// Flags
 	bool selectForUpdate;
 	// Public member functions
 	wxTable(wxDB *pwxDB, const char *tblName, const int nCols, const char *qryTblName = 0);
 	~wxTable();
 	bool	 Open(void);
 	bool	 CreateTable(void);
 	bool	 CreateIndex(char * idxName, bool unique, int noIdxCols, CidxDef *pIdxDefs);
 	bool	 CloseCursor(HSTMT cursor);
 	int	 Insert(void);
 	bool	 Update(void);
 	bool	 Update(char *pSqlStmt);
 	bool	 UpdateWhere(char *pWhereClause);
 	bool	 Delete(void);
 	bool	 DeleteWhere(char *pWhereClause);
 	bool	 DeleteMatching(void);
 	bool	 Query(bool forUpdate = FALSE, bool distinct = FALSE);
 	bool	 QueryBySqlStmt(char *pSqlStmt);
 	bool	 QueryMatching(bool forUpdate = FALSE, bool distinct = FALSE);
 	bool	 QueryOnKeyFields(bool forUpdate = FALSE, bool distinct = FALSE);
 	bool	 GetNext(void)   { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_NEXT));  }
 	bool	 operator++(int) { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_NEXT));  }
 #ifndef FWD_ONLY_CURSORS
 	bool	 GetPrev(void)   { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_PRIOR)); }
 	bool	 operator--(int) { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_PRIOR)); }
 	bool	 GetFirst(void)  { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_FIRST)); }
 	bool	 GetLast(void)   { return(getRec(SQL_FETCH_LAST));  }
 #endif
 	bool	 IsCursorClosedOnCommit(void);
 	bool	 IsColNull(int colNo);
 	UWORD	 GetRowNum(void);
 	void	 GetSelectStmt(char *pSqlStmt, int typeOfSelect, bool distinct);
 	void	 GetDeleteStmt(char *pSqlStmt, int typeOfDel, char *pWhereClause = 0);
 	void	 GetUpdateStmt(char *pSqlStmt, int typeOfUpd, char *pWhereClause = 0);
 	void	 GetWhereClause(char *pWhereClause, int typeOfWhere);
 	bool	 CanSelectForUpdate(void);
 	bool	 CanUpdByROWID(void);
 	void	 ClearMemberVars(void);
 	bool	 SetQueryTimeout(UDWORD nSeconds);
 	void	 SetColDefs (int index, char *fieldName, int dataType, void *pData, int cType,
 						  int size, bool keyField = FALSE, bool upd = TRUE,
 						  bool insAllow = TRUE, bool derivedCol = FALSE);
 	bool	 SetCursor(int cursorNo = DB_CURSOR0);
 	int	 GetCursor(void) { return(currCursorNo); }
 	ULONG	 Count(void);
 	int	 DB_STATUS(void) { return(pDb->DB_STATUS); }
 	bool	 Refresh(void);
 };  // wxTable
 #endif
--- a/include/wx/dc.h
+++ b/include/wx/dc.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DC_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DCH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DC_H_BASE_
+#define __DCH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dc.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/dc.h"
+#include "wx/xt/dc.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dc.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dc.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dc.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dc.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DC_H_BASE_
+    // __DCH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/dcclient.h
+++ b/include/wx/dcclient.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DCCLIENTH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_
+#define __DCCLIENTH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dcclient.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/dcclient.h"
+#include "wx/xt/dcclient.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dcclient.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dcclient.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dcclient.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dcclient.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DCCLIENT_H_BASE_
+    // __DCCLIENTH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/dcmemory.h
+++ b/include/wx/dcmemory.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DCMEMORYH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_
+#define __DCMEMORYH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dcmemory.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/dcmemory.h"
+#include "wx/xt/dcmemory.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dcmemory.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dcmemory.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dcmemory.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dcmemory.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DCMEMORY_H_BASE_
+    // __DCMEMORYH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/dcprint.h
+++ b/include/wx/dcprint.h
@@ -1,9 +1,9 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DCPRINT_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DCPRINTH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DCPRINT_H_BASE_
+#define __DCPRINTH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dcprint.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DCPRINT_H_BASE_
+    // __DCPRINTH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/dcscreen.h
+++ b/include/wx/dcscreen.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DCSCREENH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_
+#define __DCSCREENH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dcscreen.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/dcscreen.h"
+#include "wx/xt/dcscreen.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dcscreen.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dcscreen.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dcscreen.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dcscreen.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DCSCREEN_H_BASE_
+    // __DCSCREENH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/dde.h
+++ b/include/wx/dde.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DDE_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DDEH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DDE_H_BASE_
+#define __DDEH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dde.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/dde.h"
+#include "wx/xt/dde.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dde.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dde.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dde.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dde.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DDE_H_BASE_
+    // __DDEH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/debug.h
+++ b/include/wx/debug.h
@@ -9,8 +9,8 @@
 // Licence:   	wxWindows license
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#ifndef   _WX_DEBUG_H_
+#ifndef   __DEBUGH__
-#define   _WX_DEBUG_H_
+#define   __DEBUGH__
 #include  <assert.h>
@@ -31,7 +31,7 @@
  <BR>
  <BR>
  Extensive use of these macros is recommended! Remember that ASSERTs are
-  disabled in final (without WXDEBUG defined) build, so they add strictly
+  disabled in final (without DEBUG defined) build, so they add strictly
  nothing to your program's code. On the other hand, CHECK macros do stay
  even in release builds, but in general are not much of a burden, while
  a judicious use of them might increase your program's stability.
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@
 /** @name Macros which are completely disabled in 'release' mode */
 //@{
-#ifdef  __WXDEBUG__
+#ifdef  __DEBUG__
  /**
  this function may be redefined to do something non trivial and is called
  whenever one of debugging macros fails (i.e. condition is false in an
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@
  @param   szFile and nLine - file name and line number of the ASSERT
           szMsg            - optional message explaining the reason
  */
-  void wxOnAssert(const char *szFile, int nLine, const char *szMsg = (const char *) NULL);
+  void wxOnAssert(const char *szFile, int nLine, const char *szMsg = NULL);
  /// generic assert macro
  #define   wxASSERT(cond)   if ( !(cond) ) wxOnAssert(__FILE__, __LINE__)
@@ -62,7 +62,7 @@
  // no more bugs ;-)
  #define   wxASSERT(cond)
  #define   wxASSERT_MSG(x, m)
-#endif  //WXDEBUG
+#endif  //DEBUG
  /// special form of assert: always triggers it (in debug mode)
 #define   wxFAIL                 wxASSERT(0)
@@ -99,5 +99,5 @@
 //@}
-#endif  // _WX_DEBUG_H_
+#endif  // __DEBUGH__
--- a/include/wx/defs.h
+++ b/include/wx/defs.h
@@ -9,14 +9,14 @@
 // Licence:   	wxWindows licence
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#ifndef _WX_DEFS_H_
+#ifndef __DEFSH__
-#define _WX_DEFS_H_
+#define __DEFSH__
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "defs.h"
 #endif
-#ifdef __WXGTK__
+#ifdef __GTK__
 #include "glib.h"
 #include "gdk/gdk.h"
@@ -30,14 +30,8 @@
 #include "wx/version.h"
 // Helps SGI compilation, apparently
-#if defined(__SGI__) 
+#if defined(__SGI__) && defined(__GNUG__)
 #if defined(__GNUG__)
 #define __need_wchar_t
 #else
 /* Note I use the term __SGI_CC__ for both cc and CC, its not a good idea to 
 * mix gcc and cc/CC, the name mangling is different */
 #define __SGI_CC__
 #endif
 #endif
 // Eliminate double/float warnings
@@ -49,15 +43,19 @@
 //////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // Currently Only MS-Windows/NT, XView and Motif are supported
 //
-#if defined(__HPUX__) && !defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#if defined(__HPUX__) && !defined(__MOTIF__)
-# define __WXMOTIF__
+# define __MOTIF__
 #endif
-#if defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#if defined(__MOTIF__)
 # define __X__
 #elif defined(__WINDOWS__) || defined(__WINDOWS_386__) || defined(__NT__) || defined(__MSDOS__) 
 # ifndef __WINDOWS__
 #  define __WINDOWS__
 # endif
 #endif
 // wxWindows checks for WIN32, not __WIN32__
-#if ((defined(WIN32) || defined(__NT__)) && !defined(__WIN32__) && !defined(__WXSTUBS__))
+#if ((defined(WIN32) || defined(__NT__)) && !defined(__WIN32__))
 #define __WIN32__
 #endif
@@ -70,14 +68,13 @@
 #endif
 // Make sure the environment is set correctly
-#if defined(__WXMSW__) && defined(__X__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__) && defined(__X__)
 # error "Target can't be both X and Windows"
-#elif !defined(__WXMOTIF__) && !defined(__WXMSW__) && !defined(__WXGTK__) && \
+#elif !defined(__MOTIF__) && !defined(__WINDOWS__) && !defined(__GTK__) && !defined(__MAC__) && !defined(__X__)
-      !defined(__WXMAC__) && !defined(__X__) && !defined(__WXQT__) && !defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#error "No Target! Use -D[__MOTIF__|__GTK__|__WINDOWS__|__MAC__]"
 #error "No Target! Use -D[__WXMOTIF__|__WXGTK__|__WXMSW__|__WXMAC__|__WXQT__|__WXSTUBS__]"
 #endif
-#if defined(__WXMOTIF__) || defined(__WXGTK__) || defined(__WXQT__) || defined(__WXSTUBS__)
+#if defined(__MOTIF__) || defined(__GTK__)
 // Bool is now obsolete, use bool instead
 // typedef int Bool;
@@ -88,7 +85,7 @@
 # define Bool_DEFINED
 #endif
-#elif defined(__WXMSW__)
+#elif defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #ifndef TRUE
 # define TRUE  1
@@ -122,7 +119,7 @@ typedef int wxWindowID;
 * Making or using wxWindows as a Windows DLL
 */
-#ifdef __WXMSW__
+#ifdef __WINDOWS__
 #ifdef __BORLANDC__
@@ -175,9 +172,22 @@ typedef int wxWindowID;
 class WXDLLEXPORT wxObject;
 class WXDLLEXPORT wxEvent;
- /** symbolic constant used by all Find()-like functions returning positive
+// Vadim's types - check whether we need them all
 /// the type for various indexes (string, arrays, ...)
 typedef unsigned int    uint;
 /// extended boolean type: { yes, no, may be }
 typedef signed   int    EBool;
 /// with TRUE and FALSE is a possible value for a "3-state" boolean var
 #define UNKNOWN         (-1)
  /** symbolic constant used by all Find()-like functions returning positive
      integer on success as failure indicator */
 #define NOT_FOUND       (-1)
  /** useful for Windows programmers: makes somewhat more clear all these 
      zeroes being passed to Windows APIs */
 #define RESERVED        (NULL)
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // Error codes
@@ -200,32 +210,10 @@ enum  ErrCode
 /** @name Very common macros */
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 //@{
-/// delete pointer if it is not NULL and NULL it afterwards
+/// delete pointer if it is not NULL
-// (checking that it's !NULL before passing it to delete is just a
+#define DELETEP(p)      if ( (p) != NULL ) delete (p)
-//  a question of style, because delete will do it itself anyhow, but it might
+/// delete array pointer if it is not NULL
-//  be considered as an error by some overzealous debugging implementations of
+#define DELETEA(p)      if ( (p) != NULL ) delete [] (p)
 //  the library, so we do it ourselves)
 #if defined(__SGI_CC__)
 // Okay this is bad styling, but the native SGI compiler is very picky, it 
 // wont let you compare/assign between a NULL (void *) and another pointer
 // type. To be really clean we'd need to pass in another argument, the type 
 // of p. 
 // Also note the use of 0L, this would allow future possible 64bit support 
 // (as yet untested) by ensuring that we zero all the bits in a pointer 
 // (which is always the same length as a long (at least with the LP64 standard) 
 // --- offer aug 98
 #define wxDELETE(p)      if ( (p) ) { delete (p); p = 0L; }
 #else
 #define wxDELETE(p)      if ( (p) != NULL ) { delete p; p = NULL; }
 #endif /* __SGI__CC__ */
 // delete an array and NULL it (see comments above)
 #if defined(__SGI_CC__)
 // see above comment.
 #define wxDELETEA(p)      if ( (p) ) { delete [] (p); p = 0L; }
 #else
 #define wxDELETEA(p)      if ( ((void *) (p)) != NULL ) { delete [] p; p = NULL; }
 #endif /* __SGI__CC__ */
 /// size of statically declared array
 #define WXSIZEOF(array)   (sizeof(array)/sizeof(array[0]))
@@ -235,13 +223,17 @@ enum  ErrCode
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // OS
-#if     defined(__HPUX__) || defined(____SVR4____) || defined(__LINUX__) || defined(__sgi )
+#if     defined(__HPUX__) || defined(____SVR4____) || defined(__LINUX__)
  #ifndef __UNIX__
    #define __UNIX__
  #endif
 #endif
 #ifndef __UNIX__                     // Windows
  #ifndef __WINDOWS__
    #define __WINDOWS__
  #endif
  #if   defined(_MSC_VER)
    #define __VISUALC__
  #elif defined(__BCPLUSPLUS__) && !defined(__BORLANDC__)
@@ -254,6 +246,14 @@ enum  ErrCode
 #endif  // OS
 #if     defined(__UNIX__)
  #define FILE_PATH_SEPARATOR   ('/')
 #elif   defined(__WINDOWS__)
  #define FILE_PATH_SEPARATOR   ('\\')
 #else
  #error "don't know path separator for this platform"
 #endif
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
 // compiler specific settings
 // ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
@@ -367,10 +367,8 @@ typedef void (*wxFunction) (wxObject&, wxEvent&);
 */
 #define wxTB_3DBUTTONS      0x8000
 #define wxTB_HORIZONTAL     0x0002
 #define wxTB_VERTICAL       0x0004
 // Flatbar/Coolbar under Win98
-#define wxTB_FLAT           0x0008
+#define wxTB_FLAT           0x0002
 /*
 * Apply to all panel items
@@ -389,14 +387,21 @@ typedef void (*wxFunction) (wxObject&, wxEvent&);
 * Styles for wxListBox
 */
 // In wxListBox style flag
 #define wxSB_MASK           0x0008
 #define wxNEEDED_SB         0x0000
 #define wxALWAYS_SB         0x0008
 // New naming convention
 #define wxLB_NEEDED_SB      wxNEEDED_SB
 #define wxLB_ALWAYS_SB      wxALWAYS_SB
 #define wxLB_SORT           0x0010
-#define wxLB_SINGLE         0x0020
+// These duplicate the styles in the Multiple argument
 #define wxLB_SINGLE         0x0000
 #define wxLB_MULTIPLE       0x0040
 #define wxLB_EXTENDED       0x0080
 // wxLB_OWNERDRAW is Windows-only
 #define wxLB_OWNERDRAW      0x0100
 #define wxLB_NEEDED_SB      0x0200
 #define wxLB_ALWAYS_SB      0x0400
 #define wxLB_HSCROLL        wxHSCROLL
 /*
@@ -409,16 +414,19 @@ typedef void (*wxFunction) (wxObject&, wxEvent&);
 #define wxTE_READONLY       0x0010
 #define wxTE_MULTILINE      0x0020
-// MSW-only
+// TODO For backward compatibility, need wxOLD_READONLY
-#define wxTE_RICHTEXT       0x0020
+#define wxREADONLY          wxTE_READONLY
 #define wxEDITABLE          0
 // #define wxTE_RICHTEXT       0x0020
 /*
 * wxComboBox style flags
 */
 #define wxCB_SIMPLE         0x0004
 #define wxCB_DROPDOWN       0x0000
 #define wxCB_SORT           0x0008
-#define wxCB_READONLY       0x0010
+#define wxCB_READONLY       wxREADONLY
 #define wxCB_DROPDOWN       0x0020
 /*
 * wxRadioBox/wxRadioButton style flags
@@ -657,35 +665,26 @@ typedef enum {
 // Possible SetSize flags
 // Use internally-calculated width if -1
-#define wxSIZE_AUTO_WIDTH       0x0001
+#define wxSIZE_AUTO_WIDTH       1
 // Use internally-calculated height if -1
-#define wxSIZE_AUTO_HEIGHT      0x0002
+#define wxSIZE_AUTO_HEIGHT      2
 // Use internally-calculated width and height if each is -1
-#define wxSIZE_AUTO             (wxSIZE_AUTO_WIDTH|wxSIZE_AUTO_HEIGHT)
+#define wxSIZE_AUTO             3
 // Ignore missing (-1) dimensions (use existing).
 // For readability only: test for wxSIZE_AUTO_WIDTH/HEIGHT in code.
-#define wxSIZE_USE_EXISTING     0x0000
+#define wxSIZE_USE_EXISTING     0
 // Allow -1 as a valid position
-#define wxSIZE_ALLOW_MINUS_ONE  0x0004
+#define wxSIZE_ALLOW_MINUS_ONE  4
 // Don't do parent client adjustments (for implementation only)
 #define wxSIZE_NO_ADJUSTMENTS   0x0008
-
+// Clipboard formats
-// Data format for drag & drop and clipboard operations
+// Numbers as per winuser.h
-// numbers as per winuser.h
+# define wxCF_TEXT               1 /* CF_TEXT */
-
+# define wxCF_BITMAP             2 /* CF_BITMAP */
-enum wxDataFormat
+# define wxCF_METAFILE           3 /* CF_METAFILEPICT */
-{
+# define wxCF_DIB                8 /* CF_DIB */
-  wxDF_TEXT =             1,  /* CF_TEXT */
+# define wxCF_OEMTEXT            7 /* CF_OEMTEXT */
  wxDF_BITMAP =           2,  /* CF_BITMAP */
  wxDF_METAFILE =         3,  /* CF_METAFILEPICT */
  wxDF_DIB =              8,  /* CF_DIB */
  wxDF_OEMTEXT =          7,  /* CF_OEMTEXT */
  wxDF_FILENAME =         15  /* CF_HDROP */
 };
 // Virtual keycodes
 enum _Virtual_keycodes {
 WXK_BACK    =   8,
 WXK_TAB     =   9,
@@ -770,23 +769,20 @@ enum _Virtual_keycodes {
 // OS mnemonics -- Identify the running OS (useful for Windows)
 // [Not all platforms are currently available or supported]
 enum {
-  wxUNKNOWN_PLATFORM,
+  wxCURSES,
  wxCURSES,     // Text-only CURSES
  wxXVIEW_X,	// Sun's XView OpenLOOK toolkit
  wxMOTIF_X,	// OSF Motif 1.x.x
-  wxCOSE_X,	    // OSF Common Desktop Environment
+  wxCOSE_X,	// OSF Common Desktop Environment
  wxNEXTSTEP,	// NeXTStep
  wxMACINTOSH,	// Apple System 7
-  wxGTK,	    // GTK
+  wxGEOS,	// GEOS
-  wxQT,	        // Qt
+  wxOS2_PM,	// OS/2 Workplace
  wxGEOS,	    // GEOS
  wxOS2_PM,	    // OS/2 Workplace
  wxWINDOWS,	// Windows or WfW
  wxPENWINDOWS,	// Windows for Pen Computing
  wxWINDOWS_NT,	// Windows NT
-  wxWIN32S,	    // Windows 32S API
+  wxWIN32S,	// Windows 32S API
-  wxWIN95,	    // Windows 95
+  wxWIN95,	// Windows 95
-  wxWIN386	    // Watcom 32-bit supervisor modus
+  wxWIN386	// Watcom 32-bit supervisor modus
 };
 // Printing
@@ -836,9 +832,8 @@ enum {
 #define wxID_APPLY              5102
 #define wxID_YES                5103
 #define wxID_NO                 5104
 #define wxID_STATIC             5105
-#ifdef __WXMSW__
+#ifdef __WINDOWS__
 // Stand-ins for Windows types, to avoid
 // #including all of windows.h
@@ -852,7 +847,6 @@ typedef unsigned long   WXHBRUSH;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHPALETTE;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHCURSOR;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHRGN;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHACCEL;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHINSTANCE;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHBITMAP;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHIMAGELIST;
@@ -864,20 +858,19 @@ typedef unsigned short  WXWORD;
 typedef unsigned int    WXWPARAM;
 typedef long            WXLPARAM;
 typedef unsigned long   WXCOLORREF;
 typedef void *          WXRGN;
 typedef void *          WXRGNDATA;
 typedef void *          WXMSG;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHCONV;
 typedef unsigned long   WXHKEY;
 typedef void *          WXDRAWITEMSTRUCT;
 typedef void *          WXMEASUREITEMSTRUCT;
 typedef void *          WXLPCREATESTRUCT;
 #ifdef __GNUWIN32__
 typedef int (*WXFARPROC)();
 #else
 typedef int (__stdcall *WXFARPROC)();
 #endif
 #endif
 // for drag & drop and clipboard operations
 typedef unsigned short wxDataFormat;
 #endif
-    // _WX_DEFS_H_
+    // __WXDEFSH__
--- a/include/wx/dialog.h
+++ b/include/wx/dialog.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DIALOGH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_
+#define __DIALOGH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dialog.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/dialog.h"
+#include "wx/xt/dialog.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dialog.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dialog.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dialog.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dialog.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DIALOG_H_BASE_
+    // __DIALOGH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/dirdlg.h
+++ b/include/wx/dirdlg.h
@@ -1,19 +1,13 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DIRDLGH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_
+#define __DIRDLGH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/dirdlg.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#include "wx/motif/dirdlg.h"
+#include "wx/xt/dirdlg.h"
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dirdlg.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dirdlg.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dirdlg.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dirdlg.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DIRDLG_H_BASE_
+    // __DIRDLGH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/dnd.h
+++ b/include/wx/dnd.h
@@ -1,20 +1,14 @@
-#ifndef _WX_DND_H_BASE_
+#ifndef __DNDH_BASE__
-#define _WX_DND_H_BASE_
+#define __DNDH_BASE__
-#if defined(__WXMSW__)
+#if defined(__WINDOWS__)
 #include "wx/msw/ole/dropsrc.h"
 #include "wx/msw/ole/droptgt.h"
 #include "wx/msw/ole/dataobj.h"
-#elif defined(__WXMOTIF__)
+#elif defined(__MOTIF__)
-#elif defined(__WXGTK__)
+#elif defined(__GTK__)
 #include "wx/gtk/dnd.h"
 #elif defined(__WXQT__)
 #include "wx/qt/dnd.h"
 #elif defined(__WXMAC__)
 #include "wx/mac/dnd.h"
 #elif defined(__WXSTUBS__)
 #include "wx/stubs/dnd.h"
 #endif
 #endif
-    // _WX_DND_H_BASE_
+    // __DNDH_BASE__
--- a/include/wx/docmdi.h
+++ b/include/wx/docmdi.h
@@ -1,83 +0,0 @@
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 // Name:        docmdi.h
 // Purpose:     Frame classes for MDI document/view applications
 // Author:      Julian Smart
 // Modified by:
 // Created:     01/02/97
 // RCS-ID:      $Id$
 // Copyright:   (c)
 // Licence:   	wxWindows licence
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
 #ifndef _WX_DOCMDI_H_
 #define _WX_DOCMDI_H_
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "docmdi.h"
 #endif
 #include "wx/docview.h"
 #include "wx/mdi.h"
 /*
 * Use this instead of wxMDIParentFrame
 */
 class wxDocMDIParentFrame: public wxMDIParentFrame
 {
  DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocMDIParentFrame)
 public:
  wxDocMDIParentFrame(wxDocManager *manager, wxFrame *parent, wxWindowID id,
      const wxString& title, const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition,
      const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize, long style = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE, const wxString& name = "frame");
  bool OnClose(void);
  // Extend event processing to search the document manager's event table
  virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
  wxDocManager *GetDocumentManager(void) const { return m_docManager; }
  void OnExit(wxCommandEvent& event);
  void OnMRUFile(wxCommandEvent& event);
 protected:
  wxDocManager *m_docManager;
 DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
 };
 /*
 * Use this instead of wxMDIChildFrame
 */
 class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocMDIChildFrame: public wxMDIChildFrame
 {
  DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocMDIChildFrame)
 public:
  wxDocMDIChildFrame(wxDocument *doc, wxView *view, wxMDIParentFrame *frame, wxWindowID id,
    const wxString& title, const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition, const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
    long type = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE, const wxString& name = "frame");
  ~wxDocMDIChildFrame(void);
  bool OnClose(void);
  // Extend event processing to search the view's event table
  virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
  void OnActivate(wxActivateEvent& event);
  inline wxDocument *GetDocument(void) const { return m_childDocument; }
  inline wxView *GetView(void) const { return m_childView; }
  inline void SetDocument(wxDocument *doc) { m_childDocument = doc; }
  inline void SetView(wxView *view) { m_childView = view; }
 protected:
  wxDocument*       m_childDocument;
  wxView*           m_childView;
 DECLARE_EVENT_TABLE()
 };
 #endif
    // _WX_DOCMDI_H_
--- a/include/wx/docview.h
+++ b/include/wx/docview.h
@@ -9,8 +9,8 @@
 // Licence:   	wxWindows licence
 /////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
-#ifndef _WX_DOCH__
+#ifndef __DOCH__
-#define _WX_DOCH__
+#define __DOCH__
 #ifdef __GNUG__
 #pragma interface "docview.h"
@@ -56,7 +56,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocument : public wxEvtHandler
 {
  DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxDocument)
 public:
-  wxDocument(wxDocument *parent = (wxDocument *) NULL);
+  wxDocument(wxDocument *parent = NULL);
  ~wxDocument(void);
  void SetFilename(const wxString& filename, bool notifyViews = FALSE);
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocument : public wxEvtHandler
  inline wxList& GetViews(void) const { return (wxList&) m_documentViews; }
  wxView *GetFirstView(void) const;
-  virtual void UpdateAllViews(wxView *sender = (wxView *) NULL, wxObject *hint = (wxObject *) NULL);
+  virtual void UpdateAllViews(wxView *sender = NULL, wxObject *hint = NULL);
  // Remove all views (because we're closing the document)
  virtual bool DeleteAllViews(void);
@@ -146,7 +146,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxView: public wxEvtHandler
 {
  DECLARE_ABSTRACT_CLASS(wxView)
 public:
-  wxView(wxDocument *doc = (wxDocument *) NULL);
+  wxView(wxDocument *doc = NULL);
  ~wxView(void);
  inline wxDocument *GetDocument(void) const { return m_viewDocument; }
@@ -161,7 +161,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxView: public wxEvtHandler
  virtual void OnActivateView(bool activate, wxView *activeView, wxView *deactiveView);
  virtual void OnDraw(wxDC *dc) = 0;
  virtual void OnPrint(wxDC *dc, wxObject *info);
-  virtual void OnUpdate(wxView *sender, wxObject *hint = (wxObject *) NULL);
+  virtual void OnUpdate(wxView *sender, wxObject *hint = NULL);
  virtual void OnChangeFilename(void);
  // Called by framework if created automatically by the
@@ -212,7 +212,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocTemplate: public wxObject
  // template/document type
  wxDocTemplate(wxDocManager *manager, const wxString& descr, const wxString& filter, const wxString& dir,
     const wxString& ext, const wxString& docTypeName, const wxString& viewTypeName,
-     wxClassInfo *docClassInfo = (wxClassInfo *) NULL, wxClassInfo *viewClassInfo = (wxClassInfo *)NULL,
+     wxClassInfo *docClassInfo = NULL, wxClassInfo *viewClassInfo = NULL,
     long flags = wxDEFAULT_TEMPLATE_FLAGS);
  ~wxDocTemplate(void);
@@ -283,9 +283,9 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocManager: public wxEvtHandler
  void OnUndo(wxCommandEvent& event);
  void OnRedo(wxCommandEvent& event);
-  // Extend event processing to search the view's event table
+#ifdef WXWIN_COMPATIBILITY
-  virtual bool ProcessEvent(wxEvent& event);
+  virtual wxDocument *CreateDocument(char *WXUNUSED(path), long WXUNUSED(flags = 0)) { return NULL; };
-
+#endif
  virtual wxDocument *CreateDocument(const wxString& path, long flags = 0);
  virtual wxView *CreateView(wxDocument *doc, long flags = 0);
  virtual void DeleteTemplate(wxDocTemplate *temp, long flags = 0);
@@ -317,7 +317,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocManager: public wxEvtHandler
  // Views or windows should inform the document manager
  // when a view is going in or out of focus
  virtual void ActivateView(wxView *view, bool activate = TRUE, bool deleting = FALSE);
-  virtual wxView *GetCurrentView(void) const;
+  virtual inline wxView *GetCurrentView(void) const { return m_currentView; }
  virtual inline wxList& GetDocuments(void) const { return (wxList&) m_docs; }
@@ -355,7 +355,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocChildFrame: public wxFrame
  DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocChildFrame)
 public:
-  wxDocChildFrame(wxDocument *doc, wxView *view, wxFrame *frame, wxWindowID id, const wxString& title,
+  wxDocChildFrame(wxDocument *doc, wxView *view, wxFrame *frame, const wxString& title,
    const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition, const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
    long type = wxDEFAULT_FRAME_STYLE, const wxString& name = "frame");
  ~wxDocChildFrame(void);
@@ -387,7 +387,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocParentFrame: public wxFrame
 {
  DECLARE_CLASS(wxDocParentFrame)
 public:
-  wxDocParentFrame(wxDocManager *manager, wxFrame *frame, wxWindowID id, const wxString& title,
+  wxDocParentFrame(wxDocManager *manager, wxFrame *frame, const wxString& title,
    const wxPoint& pos = wxDefaultPosition, const wxSize& size = wxDefaultSize,
    long type = wxDEFAULT_FRAME, const wxString& name = "frame");
@@ -416,7 +416,7 @@ class WXDLLEXPORT wxDocPrintout: public wxPrintout
 {
  DECLARE_DYNAMIC_CLASS(wxDocPrintout)
 public:
-  wxDocPrintout(wxView *view = (wxView *) NULL, const wxString& title = "Printout");
+  wxDocPrintout(wxView *view = NULL, const wxString& title = "Printout");
  bool OnPrintPage(int page);
  bool HasPage(int page);
  bool OnBeginDocument(int startPage, int endPage);
--- a/Show More
+++ b/Show More